JP2020006265A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of improving an amusement.SOLUTION: A pachinko machine 10 comprises a game board on which a game area is formed. The game area comprises plural electric accessory winning holes, and plural through gates which correspond to the respective electric accessory winning holes. Based on passage of a game ball on the through gates, a support lottery for whether or not, support of the respective electric accessories disposed on the respective electric accessory winning holes is performed, is independently performed. Based on the support lottery, a variation display of a normal pattern is started on each unit area of an accessory display part. When a winning variation display of the normal pattern is finished on a first unit area, the variation display of the normal patterns on other unit areas and a support lottery result which becomes a momentum of the variation display are reset.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out when a gaming ball enters a starting ball entry unit provided in a gaming area. In addition, when the game ball enters the starting ball entry section, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to shift to a specific game state advantageous to the player, and a pattern is displayed on a display device provided in the game area. Is displayed. Then, when the lottery is won, for example, a combination of specific patterns is finally stopped and displayed, and the gaming state shifts to the specific gaming state. In the specific game state, for example, opening and closing of a variable ball-entering device provided in a game area is executed, and payout of game balls corresponding to the number of balls entered into the variable ball-entering device is executed (for example, see Patent Literature 1).

JP 2008-35977 A

  Here, with respect to the gaming machines such as the pachinko machines exemplified above, gaming machines capable of improving interest are demanded.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest.

The present invention
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition,
Acquired information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, up to a predetermined number predetermined as a plurality of numbers,
A determination is made as to whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage unit corresponds to the preset addition information, and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage unit. In this case, an assignment determining unit that sequentially performs the assignment determination on the plurality of pieces of special information,
The game state is shifted to a predetermined assignment corresponding state based on that the assignment determination result by the assignment determining unit is an assignment corresponding result indicating that the special information to be determined corresponds to the assignment information. Means of transition;
A game replay operation is started based on the provision of the provision determination by the provision determination means, and the game return operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the provision determination means. As one time, game time control means for controlling a predetermined notification means so that the game time operation of each game time is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The game time control means, when the determination result of the grant determination means is a winning game time corresponding to the grant response result, the grant response period corresponding to the grant corresponding state from the end timing of the winning game time. When the time has elapsed, the next game time with respect to the winning game time is started,
The information that reflects the determination result when the special information related to the next game round among the special information acquired by the information acquisition unit is the target of the assignment determination, is compared with the time when the next game round is started. Is also specified at the previous timing, and based on the specified result, over the application corresponding period after the end of the winning game time and the game time operation period in which the next game time is performed, the next time A first rendering execution means for performing a series of gaming performances pertaining to a gaming performance, or a gaming performance in which the winning gaming performance is performed when the determination result of the providing determining means is a winning gaming performance corresponding to the providing corresponding result. At least any one of the second effect execution means of the second effect execution means for performing a series of game effect effects related to the selected game time over the operation operation period and the grant corresponding period after the end of the selected game time. When,
A first state in which the game ball is provided in the game area where the game ball flows down, wherein the game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter, and a second state in which the game ball can enter or is easier to enter than the first state. Switchable variable ball entry means,
A variable ball-in control means capable of changing the variable ball-in means from the first state to the second state and then performing the variable ball-in control to make the first state;
With
The provision corresponding state is a state in which the variable ball-in control by the variable ball-in control means can be executed a plurality of times,
The variable ball entry control means is capable of executing the next variable ball entry control without a game ball entering the variable ball entry means in one variable ball entry control. I do.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, interest improvement can be aimed at.

FIG. 1 is a front view showing a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view showing a main configuration of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view showing a main configuration of the pachinko machine. (A) A front view showing the configuration of a game board, and (b) an explanatory view of a display unit for accessory. FIG. 2A is a front view showing a first electric accessory and its periphery, and FIG. 2B is a front view showing a second electric accessory and its periphery. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a decorative design. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display screen of a symbol display device. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various variable display time tables. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process. The flowchart which shows the winning processing for through. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a confirmation process for a reservation notice; 9 is a flowchart illustrating normal processing. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a first electric combination handling process. 9 is a flowchart showing a first ordinary figure change start process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a first electric utility opening / closing process. 9 is a flowchart showing an off-display processing. 9 is a flowchart showing a second electric win handling process. 9 is a flowchart showing a second ordinary figure change start process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a second electric utility opening / closing process. 11 is a flowchart showing a third electric combination handling process. A timing chart for explaining a flow of a game. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration for performing various effects. The flowchart which shows the effect control processing. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a pending command handling process. 9 is a flowchart illustrating release command handling processing. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a change command handling process. A timing chart for explaining a relationship between a game flow and various effects. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a display mode displayed on a display screen in various effects. (A) A front view of a game board in the second embodiment, (b) a schematic sectional view of a first variable winning device, and (c) a schematic sectional view of a second variable winning device. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters. 9A is a flowchart illustrating a first special figure change start process, and FIG. 8B is an explanatory diagram illustrating a first table. (A) A flowchart showing a second special figure fluctuation start process, (b-1) an explanatory diagram for explaining a normal table, and (b-2) an explanatory diagram for explaining a time reduction table. 9 is a flowchart showing an open / close execution command corresponding process. The front view of the game board in 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a process for supporting electric power.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, referred to as a “pachinko machine”) that is a type of gaming machine will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are exploded perspective views showing main components of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 2, the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the game area is omitted for convenience.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a game machine main body 12 rotatably mounted forward with respect to the outer frame 11. . The outer frame 11 is formed by connecting a wooden plate or the like to four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in a game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to island facilities.

  The gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11. More specifically, the inner frame 13 is rotatable forward with the left side being the rotation base end side and the right side being the rotation end side in front view.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation end side in front view. It has been. As shown in FIG. 3, a back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13. The back pack unit 15 is rotated rearward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation end side in front view. It is possible to move.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device 16 at the tip end of its rotation, so that the gaming machine main body 12 can be unlocked from the outer frame 11 in a locked state. And has a function to lock the front door frame 14 so that it cannot be opened with respect to the inner frame 13. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using an unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 exposed on the front of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 21 so that almost the entire game area can be visually recognized from the front. The window 21 has a substantially elliptical shape, and the window panel 22 is fitted therein. The window panel 22 is formed of glass and is colorless and transparent, but is not limited to this, and may be formed of synthetic resin to be colorless and transparent.

  Around the window 21, light-emitting means such as various lamps are provided. A display lamp unit 23 is provided above the window 21 as a part of the various lamp units. Further, on both left and right sides of the display lamp section 23, there are provided speaker sections 24 for outputting a sound effect or the like according to a game state.

  Below the window 21 in the front door frame 14, an upper swelling portion 25 and a lower swelling portion 26 swelling toward the near side are vertically arranged side by side. An upper plate 25a opening upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 25, and a lower plate 26a also opening upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 26. The upper plate 25a temporarily stores game balls paid out from a payout device described later, and guides the game balls to the game ball firing mechanism 27 side (see FIG. 2) having a function of firing the game balls while aligning them in a line. Has functions. The lower plate 26a has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper plate 25a. The game balls paid out from the payout device of the back pack unit 15 are discharged to the upper plate 25a and the lower plate 26a through the passage forming unit 28 provided on the back surface of the front door frame 14.

  A firing handle 29 is provided on the front door frame 14 to the right of the lower plate 26a. By operating the firing handle 29, game balls are fired from the game ball firing mechanism 27 provided below the game area in the inner frame toward the game area. In this case, by changing the amount of rotation of the firing handle 29, the firing strength of a game ball fired toward the game area, that is, the firing momentum is changed.

  Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

  The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 31 whose outer shape is substantially the same as the outer frame 11. A substantially oval window 32 is formed in the center of the resin base 31. A game board 33 having a game area formed on the front side is detachably attached to the resin base 31. The game board 33 is made of plywood, and the game area is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window 32 of the resin base 31.

  The configuration of the game board 33 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4A is a front view of the game board 33.

  An inner rail portion 34 and an outer rail portion 35 are attached to the surface of the game board 33, and a game area is formed so as to be partitioned by the inner rail portion 34 and the outer rail portion 35. The inner rail portion 34 and the outer rail portion 35 constitute a guide rail 36 for a game ball to a game area, and a game ball fired from the game ball firing mechanism 27 by the player rotating the firing handle 29. Is guided to the upper part of the game area by the guide rail 36.

  The guide rail 36 is formed such that an exit portion thereof is directed to the upper center of the game area on one side of the game area. Therefore, as the amount of rotation of the firing handle 29 by the player increases, the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area is shifted from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 36 is formed to the side opposite thereto. It shifts to the side of the department. The exit portion of the guide rail 36 is provided on the left side of the game area.

  The gaming board 33 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings that penetrate in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. In each opening, a general winning opening 40, a first winning win 41, a second winning win 42, a third winning win 43, a first through gate 51, a second through gate 52, a third through gate. 53, a variable display unit 61, an accessory display section 62, and the like are provided.

  When a ball enters the general winning opening 40 and each of the electrical winning openings 41 to 43, it is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) arranged on the back side of the game board 33, and based on the detection result. Payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is executed. In this case, when a ball is entered into the general winning port 40 and each of the electrical winning ports 41 to 43, payout of 10 game balls is executed.

  The number of game balls to be paid out is not limited to the above. The payout number may be different between the second winning combination 42 and the winning combination 43. Further, the number of payouts of the first winning combination 41 may be smaller than the number of payouts of the second winning opening 42 and the third winning combination 43.

  In addition, an out port 63 is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 33, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports and the like are discharged from the game area through the out port 63. In addition, a large number of nails 64 are planted on the game board 33 for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the game ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided.

  Here, the entering ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and is not only discharged from the game area after passing through the opening, but also discharged from the game area after passing through the opening. Some embodiments are not included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball from entering the out port 63, the game ball to the general winning port 40, each electric winning port 41-43, and each through gate 51-53. Entering a ball is also referred to as winning.

  Each of the through gates 51 to 53 is fixed such that a part thereof projects forward with respect to the board surface of the game board 33. The protruding portion is provided with a ball passing portion through which the game ball can pass from above (upstream side) to below (downstream side). The ball passage portion penetrates in the up-down direction and is formed larger than the game ball. As a result, the game ball flowing from above the game area passes through the ball passage portion and flows as it is to the downstream side of the game area.

  Further, each of the through gates 51 to 53 is provided with a detection sensor for detecting a game ball passing through the ball passage portion. The detection sensor is connected to a main control device described later, and the detection result of the detection sensor is output to the main control device.

  The positional relationship between the through gates 51 to 53 is set such that the game ball that has passed through the first through gate 51 can pass through the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53. Specifically, the second through gate 52 and the third through gate 53 are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. Then, the first through gate 51 is located at a position where the through gates which pass when the game ball passing through the first through gate 51 fluctuates in the horizontal direction are different, specifically, the second through gate 52 and the third through gate 53. And on the center line of both. As a result, the game ball that has passed through the first through gate 51 flows in a region surrounded by the through gates 51 to 53, and responds to the flow-down state of the game ball (lateral fluctuation of the game ball) in the region. As a result, it can pass through the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53.

  Further, between the first through gate 51 and the second through gate 52 and the third through gate 53, a game ball passing through the first through gate 51 passes through the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53. A plurality of guide nails 64a for guiding the game ball are provided. Each guide nail 64a is arranged below the first through gate 51. The guide nails 64a are arranged side by side at a distance smaller than the diameter of the game ball. The distance between the guide nail 64a and the second through gate 52 and the third through gate 53 is set so that the game ball cannot pass between the guide nail 64a and the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53. , Is set shorter than the diameter of the game ball.

  According to such a configuration, when the game ball that has passed through the first through gate 51 flows downward as it is, it hits with the guide nail 64a and is flipped, and is hit by either the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53. You will be guided. This makes it easier for the game ball that has passed the first through gate 51 to pass through the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53.

  In this case, whether the game ball that has collided with the guide nail 64a passes through the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53 depends on the collision mode between the game ball and the guide nail 64a. Therefore, whether the game ball that has passed through the first through gate 51 passes through the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53 is random.

  The relative positional relationship between the second through gate 52 and the third through gate 53 in the vertical direction is set to be the same, but is not limited to this, and may be configured to be shifted in the vertical direction, for example. However, from the viewpoint of randomness, it is preferable that the relative positional relationship in the vertical direction is set to be the same.

  Here, the frequency with which the game ball passes through the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53 via the first through gate 51 is configured to be higher than the frequency without passing through the first through gate 51. ing. Specifically, a regulating nail 64b that regulates a flow-down state of the game ball so that the game ball that passes through the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53 is hardly generated without passing through the first through gate 51. Is provided. The restriction nail 64b is provided on a path other than the path through the first through gate 51 among the flowing paths of the game balls toward the second through gate 52 and the third through gate 53. The interval between the control nails 64b is set smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

  According to such a configuration, a game ball flowing on the flow-down path via the first through gate 51 flows down in the space formed by the through gates 51 to 53 and the nails 64a and 64b, and the second through gate 52 or the second It easily passes through the three through gate 53. On the other hand, a game ball flowing on the flow-down path not passing through the first through gate 51 is hardly passed through the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53 by being hit by each control nail 64b.

  The distance between the lowermost one of the control nails 64b and the guide nail 64a is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, an event may occur in which the game ball passes through the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53 without passing through the first through gate 51. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the respective distances may be made smaller than the diameter of the game ball so that the above-mentioned event does not occur.

  When a winning in each of the through gates 51 to 53 is detected, an internal lottery is performed. The lottery result of the internal lottery is displayed on the accessory display unit 62. The accessory display section 62 is provided on a decorative member 65 disposed along the outer edge on the lower side of the game area. The decorative member 65 extends from the board of the gaming board 33 to the front of the pachinko machine 10. More specifically, the front surface of the decorative member 65 faces the window panel 22 provided on the front door frame 14 so that the game area can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The distance between them is smaller than one game ball. This prevents the game ball from falling in front of the front surface of the decorative member 65.

  The accessory display section 62 is provided so as to be exposed from the front surface of the decorative member 65. In other words, the accessory display section 62 is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 22 of the front door frame 14, and the game ball falls in front of the accessory display section 62. Has been prevented. In addition, on the upper surface of the decorative member 65, a part of the plurality of general winning openings 40 described above is installed in a state opened upward.

  The accessory display unit 62 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4B is a front view of the accessory display unit 62.

  In the display unit 62 for the accessory, a display area 70 is formed in which a result of an internal lottery performed based on a winning in each of the through gates 51 to 53 is specified. The display area 70 is vertically partitioned into three unit areas 71 to 73, and the unit areas 71 to 73 and the through gates 51 to 53 correspond one-to-one. Specifically, the first unit region 71 is associated with the first through gate 51, the second unit region 72 is associated with the second through gate 52, and the third unit region 73 is associated with the third through gate 52. It is associated with the gate 53.

  In each of the unit areas 71 to 73, a normal symbol of "O" and "X" is formed so as to be displayed. When a prize is generated in a predetermined through gate (for example, the first through gate 51), the prize is used as a trigger to set “O” and “X” in a unit area (for example, the first unit area 71) corresponding to the predetermined through gate. Are displayed alternately (variable display) of the normal symbol, and the variable display of the ordinary symbol is performed over a predetermined time (period). If the lottery result of the internal lottery is a winning result, a normal symbol “O” is displayed as a stop result corresponding to the winning result in the corresponding unit area, and the variable display ends. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the internal lottery is a missed result, a normal symbol “x” is displayed as a stop result corresponding to the missed result, and the variable display ends.

  It is needless to say that the specific shape of the ordinary symbol is arbitrary as long as it can be specified that the symbol is a winning result or a departure result. Further, the variable display mode of the ordinary symbols is also arbitrary.

  In the following description, when the lottery result of the internal lottery based on winning in the first through gate 51 is a winning result, the variable display of the ordinary symbol performed in the first unit area 71 is simply referred to as the first unit area 71. The variation display of the ordinary symbol performed in the first unit area 71 when the lottery result of the internal lottery based on the winning in the first through gate 51 is a deviation result is simply referred to as the first unit area 71. Out fluctuation display. The same applies to the second unit region 72 and the third unit region 73.

  Further, the variation display of the first unit area 71 is started, the stop result corresponding to the internal lottery result is stopped (fixed) and displayed, and the process until the variation display is stopped corresponds to one game time.

  In the case where the ordinary symbol “O” is stopped and displayed based on the result of the internal lottery being the winning result, the winning combination corresponding to the predetermined through gate is selected from the winning combinations 41 to 43 of the respective winning combinations. Is expected to be higher.

  The detailed configuration of each of the winning combinations 41 to 43 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a front view showing the first electric winning opening 41 and its surroundings, and FIG. 5B is a front view showing the second electric winning opening 42 and its surroundings. Since the second and third electric wins 42 and 43 are the same, including the peripheral structure, the second electric win 42 will be described and the third electric win 43 will be described. Will not be described in detail.

  Electric winning combinations 41a to 43a are respectively provided in the winning combinations 41 to 43. Each of the electric accessories 41a to 43a has a pair of left and right movable pieces, and can be switched between a closed state (closed state, non-support state or non-guide state) and an open state (open state, support state or guide state). Is configured. In the closed state, since the distance between the left and right movable pieces is small, it is difficult for the game ball to win each of the electric winning holes 41 to 43. On the other hand, in the open state, as shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 5, the distance between the left and right movable pieces is large, so that the gaming balls can easily win the respective electric winning openings 41 to 43. In other words, in the open state, it can be said that the flow path of the game ball to each of the electronic winning holes 41 to 43 is larger than in the closed state.

  In the following description, an open state of each of the electric auditors 41a to 43a is simply called an open state, and a closed state of each of the electric auditors 41a to 43a is simply called a closed state.

  Each electric accessory 41a to 43a is associated with each through gate 51 to 53 (and each unit area 71 to 73) on a one-to-one basis. Specifically, the first motor-operated object 41 a provided in the first electric winning opening 41 is associated with the first through gate 51 (the first unit area 71), and The provided second electric accessory 42a is associated with the second through gate 52 (the second unit area 72), and the third electric accessory 43a provided in the third electric winning opening 43 has a third through-hole. It is associated with the gate 53 (third unit area 73). If the lottery result of the internal lottery based on the winning in the predetermined through gate is a winning result, after the completion of the winning variation display of the unit area corresponding to the predetermined through gate, the motor combination corresponding to the predetermined through gate is completed. The opening and closing operation of the object is performed in a predetermined operation mode. As a result, the degree of expectation of winning a prize at the electric prize winning opening provided with the electric auditors performing the opening / closing operation is increased. Note that the opening and closing operation of each of the motorized accessories 41a to 43a is also simply referred to as support. In this case, it can be said that the state in which the opening and closing operation of each of the electric auditors 41a to 43a is performed is a support state of each of the electric auditors 41a to 43a.

  Here, the first electric combination 41 is provided with the first electric combination 41a, and the first electric combination 41a is configured such that a game ball does not win regardless of the opening / closing state of the first electric combination 41a. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5 (a), a first specific control nail 64c is provided above the first electric winning hole 41 to make it impossible to win the first electric winning hole 41. Have been. A plurality of the first specific control nails 64c are arranged side by side so as to surround the first electric win winning opening 41 from the base side in the downflow direction of the game ball, and the distance between the first specific control nails 64c is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Is also set small. As a result, the gaming ball cannot win the first electric win winning opening 41.

  On the other hand, above the second electric winning opening 42 (and the third electric winning opening 43), it is not possible to win the second electric winning opening 42 when the second electric auditors feature 42a is in the closed state. When the second motor-operated object 42a is in the open state, a plurality of second specific control nails 64d that allow winning in the second electric-operator winning opening 42 are provided. The second specific control nails 64d are juxtaposed on the flow-down path to the second electric-prize winning opening 42 in a state where the second electric-operated role 42a is in the closed state. The distance between the second specific regulation nails 64d is set shorter than the diameter of the game ball. The distance between the second specific control nail 64d and the tip of the second electric accessory 42a in the closed state is set to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball, while the distance is in the open state with the second specific control nail 64d. The distance from the tip of the second electric accessory 42a in the situation is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, it is extremely difficult to win the second electric combination winning opening 42 when the second electric combination 42a is in the closed state, and the second electric combination only when the second electric combination 42a is in the open state. Winning of the winning opening 42 becomes easy.

  The configuration in which the winning in the first electric winning opening 41 is not limited to the first specific regulation nail 64c, but is arbitrary as long as the winning in the first electric winning opening 41 is not allowed. is there. For example, instead of the first specific regulation nail 64c, a configuration may be adopted in which an accessory is provided. Furthermore, a movable object is provided at a position where game balls cannot enter the first electric win winning opening 41 and at a position where the game ball is allowed to enter, and based on the support of the first electric accessory 41a being started. Alternatively, the accessory may be moved from the allowable position to a position where it is not allowed.

  In addition, regardless of the opening / closing mode of the first electric accessory 41a, it is not possible for the game ball to win the first electric accessory winning opening 41, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the open state, a prize may be allowed in the first electric win prize port 41. In this case, the degree of expectation that the gaming ball will win in the first electric win winning opening 41 in a situation where the first electric auditors hand 41a is in the open state is determined by the second electric auditors hand 42a (or the third electric auditors hand 43a) being opened. It is preferable to adjust the positions of the specific control nails 64c and 64d such that the degree of expectation that the gaming ball wins in the second electric winning opening 42 (or the third electric winning opening 43) in the state is smaller. . Further, there is no payout of the game ball based on the winning in the first electric winning opening 41, or the payout of the game ball based on the winning in the second electric winning opening 42 and the third electric winning opening 43. May be set smaller than the number of.

  In addition, even when each of the motor-operated objects 41a to 43a is in the closed state, a configuration may be such that a prize can be generated in each of the electric prize winning openings 41 to 43. In short, it is only necessary that the electric auditors 41a to 43a be configured to shift from the closed state to the open state, thereby increasing the expectation of winning in the electric winning openings 41 to 43.

  Next, a description will be given of the positional relationship between the respective winning combinations 41 to 43. The first winning combinations 41 are provided on the right side in the game area, and specifically, provided on the right side of the variable display unit 61. I have. In addition, the second electric winning hole 42 and the third electric winning hole 43 are provided above the variable display unit 61.

  In the case where a prize is generated in the second prize winning port 42 and in the case where a prize is generated in the third prize winning port 43, the second prize winning port 42 and the second prize winning port 42 need to be separated. The position of the third winning combination 43 is set. Specifically, the second and third electric winning combinations 42 and 43 are arranged at predetermined intervals in the horizontal direction in the game area. Thus, the flow path of the game ball in which a prize is likely to occur in the second electric win prize port 42 is different from the flow path of the game ball in which a prize is easily generated in the third electric win prize port 43. Therefore, when the opening / closing operation of the second electric auditors product 42a is being performed, the game ball flows down the left area of the game area in order to increase the winning frequency to the second electric winning opening 42. In the case where the amount of rotation of the firing handle 29 is changed and the opening and closing operation of the third electric accessory 43a is being performed, the right area of the gaming area is played in order to increase the winning frequency to the third electric winning opening 43. It is assumed that the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 29 is changed so that the ball flows down.

  Further, in order to preferably perform the above-mentioned separation, a game ball flowing down the leftward region of the game area is located upstream of the second electric win winning opening 42 and the third electric win winning opening 43 in the flowing direction of the game ball. There is provided a batting guiding nail 64e so that the game ball flows down toward the second electric win winning opening 42, and a game ball flowing down in the area on the right side of the gaming area flows toward the third electric winning winning opening 43.

  It should be noted that the positional relationship between the second winning part 42 and the third winning part 43 is only required to be set so that a distinction is required. For example, the first winning part 41 is arranged. A configuration in which the third electric win winning opening 43 is arranged at the position may be adopted.

  The variable display unit 61 is provided with a symbol display device 81 that displays a decorative symbol (decorative symbol) in a variable manner (or a variable or switched display). The variable display unit 61 is provided with a center frame 82 surrounding the symbol display device 81. The center frame 82 has an upper portion extending forward of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, the game balls are prevented from falling in front of the display screen G of the symbol display device 81, and there is no inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen G is reduced due to the game balls falling. ing.

  The symbol display device 81 is for notifying the lottery result of the support lottery based on winning in the first through gate 51. The symbol display device 81 is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. On the symbol display device 81, for example, decorative symbols are displayed side by side on the top, middle and bottom, and these decorative symbols are scrolled in the horizontal direction and displayed in a variable manner. In this case, the variable display on the symbol display device 81 is performed with the winning of the first through gate 51 as a trigger.

  The center frame 82 is provided with respective holding ramp portions 91 to 93 corresponding to the respective through gates 51 to 53. Specifically, a first holding ramp 91 corresponding to the first through gate 51 is provided below the center frame 82. The number of game balls that have won the first through gate 51 is retained up to a maximum of four, and the number of reserves is displayed by turning on the first retention lamp unit 91.

  A second holding ramp portion 92 corresponding to the second through gate 52 is provided in an upper left portion on the front side of the center frame 82. The number of game balls that have won the second through gate 52 is held up to a maximum of four, and the number of held balls is displayed by turning on the second holding lamp unit 92.

  In the upper right portion on the front side of the center frame 82, a third holding ramp 93 corresponding to the third through gate 53 is provided. The number of game balls that have won the third through gate 53 is retained up to a maximum of four, and the number of retained balls is displayed by turning on the third retention lamp unit 93.

  Note that each of the holding lamp units 91 to 93 may be configured to be displayed on a part of the symbol display device 81.

  A stage 94 on which game balls can stay is provided below the center frame 82. The stage 94 has a width larger than the diameter of the game ball in the front-rear direction, and has a smooth streamline shape that is symmetric about the center. Specifically, the central portion of the stage 94 in the horizontal direction is raised upward, and the left and right portions thereof are recessed downward. An inclined surface that is inclined downward toward the rear is formed at the central portion. Behind the inclined surface, a guide passage 95 having a game ball outlet above the first through gate 51 is provided. Thus, the game ball that has reached the central portion of the stage 94 is guided to the guide passage 95 by the inclined surface, and is easily guided to the upper side of the first through gate 51 by the guide passage 95. The guided game ball passes through the first through gate 51 with a relatively high probability. Thereby, the degree of attention to the movement of the game ball on the stage 94 can be increased.

  Although not shown, the center frame 82 has a game ball path for guiding the game balls to the stage 94. The game ball passage is formed in a size that allows the game ball to pass. The game ball passage is formed with an opening provided at a portion outside the center frame 82 as an entrance and an opening provided at an end of the stage 94 as an exit. As a result, the game ball that has entered the entrance portion is led out to the stage 94 via the game ball passage.

  Next, the configuration of the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a main control device 101 and a sound emission control device 102 are mounted on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 33).

  The main control device 101 includes a main control board for controlling the main control of the game, and a power failure monitoring board for monitoring a power supply. The main control board and the power failure monitoring board are provided in a board box 103 made of a transparent resin material or the like. It is housed and configured. The substrate box 103 includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box base (front case body) and a box cover (back case body) that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are inseparably connected to each other by a box connecting portion 104 serving as separation preventing means (or connecting means), whereby the board box 103 is sealed. And, by being inseparably connected by these box connecting portions 104, when opening the internal space of the substrate box 103, the substrate box 103 needs to be broken or partly cut off. A plurality of box combining units 104 are provided on the long side of the substrate box 103, and at least one of them is used to perform the combining process.

  Any configuration can be applied to the box connecting portion 104 as long as the box base and the box cover can be connected so that the box base cannot be opened. The box cover and the box cover cannot be opened. The combining process by the box combining unit 104 prevents unauthorized opening after the combining, and makes it possible to detect such a situation early and easily even if unauthorized opening is performed. Even after opening, it is possible to perform the opening process again. That is, the coupling process is performed by inserting the locking claw into at least one elongated hole of the plurality of box coupling portions 104. Then, when the board box 103 is opened, for example, when a failure occurs in the accommodated main control board or when the main control board is inspected, the box connecting section 104 into which the locking claw is inserted and the other box connecting section 104 are connected. And the connecting part with the box body are cut off. Thereby, the box base and the box cover of the board box 103 are separated, and the main control board inside can be taken out. Thereafter, when the joining process is performed again, the locking claws are inserted into the long holes of the other box joining portions 104. If a history indicating that the board box 103 has been opened is left in the board box 103, it can be easily found that the unauthorized opening has been performed by looking at the board box 103.

  In addition, as a trace means for discovering unauthorized opening of the substrate box 103, a seal may be attached so as to straddle the boundary between the box base and the box cover. In this case, when the sealing seal is peeled off from the affixed portion, the adhesive layer of the sealing seal remains on the substrate box 103 side, and a trace thereof remains. Furthermore, an IC tag for transmitting a response wave including identification information in response to a call wave of a predetermined frequency is provided on the seal, and when the seal is removed, the antenna of the IC tag is cut off and the response time is reduced. It is good also as a structure which cannot transmit a wave.

  The sound light emission control device 102 includes a sound lamp control board that controls sound and lamp display according to instructions from the main control device 101 and a display control device (not shown), and the sound lamp control board is made of a transparent resin material or the like. And is accommodated in a substrate box 105.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 111, and a payout mechanism 112 and a control device assembly unit 113 are attached to the back pack 111. The back pack 111 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and has a protective cover 114 projecting rearward and having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape so as to cover the main controller 101, the sound emission controller 102, and the like from the rear. are doing.

  The payout mechanism unit 112 is disposed so as to bypass the protective cover unit 114, and a tank 115 to which game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game arcade are sequentially replenished, and a game stored in the tank 115 And a payout device 116 for paying out balls. The game balls paid out from the payout device 116 are discharged to the upper plate 25a or the lower plate 26a through a payout passage (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the payout device 116. The dispensing mechanism 112 is provided with a back pack substrate provided with a main power supply of, for example, AC 24 volts, and provided with a power switch for performing power ON and OFF operations.

  The control device aggregation unit 113 includes a payout control device 117, a power supply and a firing control device 118. The payout control device 117 and the power supply and firing control device 118 are arranged one on top of the other so that the payout control device 117 is located behind the pachinko machine 10.

  The payout control device 117 is configured such that a payout control board that controls the payout device 116 is accommodated in a substrate box. In this case, the same fraud suppressing means as that of the board box 103 of the main control device 101 may be applied to the board box of the payout control device 117.

  The power supply and the firing control device 118 are configured such that a power supply and a firing control board are housed in a board box, and the board generates and outputs predetermined power required by various control devices and the like. The launching of the game ball is controlled in accordance with the operation of the firing handle 29. Further, the pachinko machine 10 has a function of storing and holding various data, and can retain the state at the time of power failure even in the event of a power failure, and can return to the state at the time of power failure when returning from the power failure. It has become.

<Electrical configuration>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

  An MPU 202 is mounted on a main control board 201 provided in the main control device 101. The MPU 202 is a ROM 203 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 202 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 203. This is an element in which the RAM 204, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are built. Note that a configuration may be adopted in which some of the functions of the MPU 202, such as the function of the ROM 203 and the function of the RAM 204, are provided as separate elements.

  The MPU 202 is provided with an input port and an output port. The input side of the MPU 202 is connected to a power failure monitoring board 205 provided in the main control device 101, a payout control device 117, various detection sensors 211a to 211g, and the like. In this case, the power supply and the emission control device 118 are connected to the power failure monitoring board 205, and power is supplied to the MPU 202 via the power failure monitoring board 205. In addition, as a part of the various detection sensors 211a to 211g, a plurality of detection sensors provided in a winning corresponding ball unit such as a general winning port 40, each electric winning port 41 to 43, and each through gate 51 to 53 are connected. The MPU 202 of the main control device 101 performs a winning determination (ball entry determination) for each ball entry unit. Further, the MPU 202 executes a support lottery based on a winning in each of the through gates 51 to 53.

  To the output side of the MPU 202, a power failure monitoring board 205, a payout control device 117, and a sound emission control device 102 are connected. For example, a prize ball command is output to the payout control device 117 based on a winning determination result in the general winning opening 40 and the winning combinations 41 to 43. In this case, when the award ball command is output, the command information storage area 221 of the ROM 203 is referred to. When the winning in the general winning opening 40 or each of the electrical winning openings 41 to 43 is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is output.

  The MPU 202 outputs various commands such as a hold command, a release command, and a change command to the sound emission control device 102. In this case, when outputting these various commands, the command information storage area 221 of the ROM 203 is referred to. Details of these various commands will be described later. Each of the commands is configured as information of a predetermined number of bytes, and includes various types of information as the information of the predetermined number of bytes.

  Further, on the output side of the MPU 202, a first electric auditors product drive unit 41b that opens and closes the first electric auditors product 41a of the first electric winning opening 41, and a second electric auditors 42a of the second electric winning opening 42. The second electric accessory driving unit 42b that opens and closes the third electric accessory driving unit 43b that opens and closes the third electric accessory 43a of the third electric winning opening 43 and the display unit 62 for the accessory are connected. I have. The main control board 201 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 202 executes drive control of various drive units and display control of the accessory display unit 62 through the driver circuits.

  In other words, when a prize to a predetermined through gate among the through gates 51 to 53 is detected by the detection sensor corresponding to the predetermined through gate, the prize corresponding to the predetermined through gate in the display unit 62 for the accessory is displayed. In the unit area to be displayed, a normal symbol is fluctuated and displayed. If the lottery result of the support lottery based on the winning is a winning, the drive control of the electric accessory driving unit corresponding to the predetermined through gate is executed after the end of the variable display of the ordinary symbols.

  Here, since each of the electric accessory 41a to 43a is provided in one-to-one correspondence with each of the electric accessory driving units 41b to 43b, it is possible to individually control the driving of each of the electric accessories 41a to 43a. It is possible.

  The power failure monitoring board 205 relays between the main control board 201 and the power supply and the firing control device 118, and monitors a 24 V DC stable voltage which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply and the firing control device 118. The payout control device 117 controls the payout of the prize balls and the loaned balls by the payout device 116 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 101.

  The power supply and the launch control device 118 are connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game arcade or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, the operating power required for each of the main control board 201 and the payout control device 117 is generated, and the generated operating power is supplied through a predetermined power path. I do. The power supply and launch control device 118 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launching mechanism 27, and the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met.

  Based on various commands input from the main control device 101, the sound emission control device 102 controls the holding lamp portions 91 to 93 provided in the variable display unit 61, the display lamp portion 23 provided in the front door frame 14, and the speaker. It controls the drive of the unit 24 and controls the display control device 212.

  The display control device 212 executes display control of the symbol display device 81 based on a command input from the audio light emission control device 102. In this case, based on various commands input from the main control device 101, the sound emission control device 102 determines the variation display time of the decorative symbol in the symbol display device 81 and the type of the decorative symbol combination to be finally stopped and displayed. I do.

  Here, the content related to the variable display of the decorative symbol will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 and 8.

  The display control device 212 is provided with a character ROM. As shown in FIGS. 7 (a) to 7 (i), the character ROM has nine types of main symbol data numbered "1" to "9", and as shown in FIG. 7 (j). And sub-symbol data without numbers are stored in advance.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 8A, on the display screen G of the symbol display device 81, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 of an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row are set. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is configured by arranging a main symbol and a sub symbol in a predetermined order. Then, on the display screen G, triggered by a prize in the first through gate 51 or the start of the support of the first motor-operated character 41a, the display is changed during the change display of the first unit area 71 or during the support of the first motor-operated character 41a. Thus, the decorative symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a variable manner so as to scroll in a predetermined direction (specifically, from right to left) with periodicity. In this case, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in descending numerical order, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are constituted by 18 decorative symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and the main symbol “9” and the main symbol “1” are arranged. , A main symbol of “4” is additionally arranged, and one sub symbol is arranged between each of the main symbols. That is, only the middle symbol row Z2 is composed of 20 main symbols with 10 main symbols arranged.

  In addition, by stopping and displaying the combination of decorative symbols according to the lottery result of the support lottery based on winning in the first through gate 51, it is possible to grasp the lottery result. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8B, the display screen G is configured to stop and display three decorative symbols for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine (3 × 3) symbols are displayed. Decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. Further, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right down line L4, and a right up line L5 are set on the display screen G. Then, the variable display stops in the order of upper symbol row Z1 → lower symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2, and a combination of decorative symbols (combination of big hit decorative symbols) in which the same number is assigned to any of the activated lines is formed. When the variable display of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is completed in the state in which the symbols are displayed, a moving image indicating that the player is in an advantageous state is displayed.

  In view of the fact that the variable display of each symbol row is stopped as described above, the upper symbol row Z1 is the first symbol row (or the first symbol row), and the lower symbol row Z3 is the second symbol row (or the second symbol row). The two symbol rows and the middle symbol row Z2 can be referred to as a third symbol row (or a third symbol row).

  In addition, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol in the symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and is arbitrary. The number of symbol columns, the direction of the variable display of the decorative symbol in the symbol column, and the decoration of each symbol column The number of symbols and the like can be changed as appropriate. For example, a plurality of symbol rows may be set so as to be arranged side by side, and the direction of the variable display of the decorative symbol in the symbol row may be set to the vertical direction.

<About various counters>
Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

  The MPU 202 uses various types of counter information during the game to perform a support lottery to determine whether or not to perform the opening / closing operation of each of the electric accessory 41a to 43a, to set the display of the accessory display unit 62, and the like. As shown in FIG. 9, a first electric combination counter C1 used for the support lottery of the first electric auditors goods 41a, a second electric combination counter C2 used for the support lottery of the second electric auditors goods 42a, The third electric combination counter C3 used for the support lottery of the third electric combination 43a is used. Further, a variation type counter CS for determining a variation display time that is a time during which the variation display is performed on the accessory display unit 62 is used.

  Each of the electric combination counters C1 to C3, CS is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 230 set in a predetermined area of the RAM 204. The RAM 204 is provided with each of the electric role holding areas 231 to 233 corresponding to each of the electric role counters C1 to C3, and each of the electric role counters C1 to C3 is stored in the corresponding electric role holding area. . Specifically, the first electric winning holding area 231 in which the first electric winning counter C1 is stored based on the winning in the first through gate 51, and the second electric winning counter C2 based on the winning in the second through gate 52. Is stored, and a third electric-power holding area 233 in which a third electric-power counter C3 is stored based on a winning in the third through gate 53.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first electric combination counter C1 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 240, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (240). The first electric winning counter C1 is updated periodically, and is stored in the first electric winning holding area 231 at the timing when the game ball wins the first through gate 51.

  The value of the first electric win counter C1 at which the lottery result of the support lottery is deviated is stored in the ROM 203 in advance. Specifically, when the value of the first electric win counter C1 is “7”, it is assumed that the lottery result of the support lottery is a departure result. On the other hand, if the value of the first electric win counter C1 is other than "7", it is assumed that the lottery result of the support lottery is the winning result. That is, the winning probability of the support lottery of the first electric auditors 41a is 240/241.

  It should be noted that the value of the first electrical combination counter C1 that results in the departure is arbitrary. Further, the number of the first electric combination counters C1 that result in the departure is not limited to one, and may be plural.

  The second electric combination counter C2 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 250, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (250). The second electric winning counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the second electric winning holding area 232 at the timing when the game ball wins the second through gate 52.

  The value of the second electric win counter C2 that results in the support lottery being deviated is stored in the ROM 203 in advance. Specifically, when the value of the second electric-combination counter C2 is “100”, it is assumed that the result of the support lottery is a departure result. On the other hand, if the value of the second electric combination counter C2 is other than “100”, it is assumed that the lottery result of the support lottery is the winning result. That is, the winning probability of the support lottery of the second electric auditors product 42a is 250/251.

  It should be noted that the value of the second electric-power counter C2 that is a departure result is arbitrary. Further, the number of the second electric combination counters C2 resulting in the departure is not limited to one and may be plural.

  The third electric combination counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one, for example, in the range of 0 to 232, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (232). The third electric winning counter C3 is updated periodically, and is stored in the third electric winning holding area 233 at the timing when the game ball wins the third through gate 53.

  The value of the third electric win counter C3 that results in the support lottery being deviated is stored in the ROM 203 in advance. Specifically, when the value of the third electric win counter C3 is “200”, it is assumed that the lottery result of the support lottery is a departure result. On the other hand, if the value of the third electric combination counter C3 is other than “200”, it is assumed that the lottery result of the support lottery is the winning result. That is, the winning probability of the support lottery for the third electric auditors goods 43a is 232/233.

  It should be noted that the value of the third electric combination counter C3 which is a departure result is arbitrary. Further, the number of the third electric combination counters C3 that result in the departure is not limited to one and may be plural.

  In addition, the winning probability of the support lottery for the second electric auditors hand 42a and the third electric auditors hand 43a is substantially the same, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be set to be completely the same, and the difference is increased. Is also good.

  The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS is used by the MPU 202 to determine the variation display time of the ordinary symbol in each of the unit areas 71 to 73 of the accessory display unit 62. In the following description, the variable display time of the normal symbol in each of the unit areas 71 to 73 is also simply referred to as the variable display time of each of the unit areas 71 to 73.

  Here, the fluctuation display time of the ordinary symbol in the first unit area 71 when the lottery result of the support lottery of the first electric accessory 41a is the winning result (hereinafter, also referred to as the fluctuation display time of the first unit area 71). Is set to a predetermined fixed time, specifically, 0.5 sec. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the support lottery of the first electric accessory 41a is a deviation result, the fluctuation display time of the ordinary symbol in the first unit area 71 (hereinafter, the fluctuation display time of the first unit area 71 also varies) Is changed according to the change type counter CS. Further, the variation display time of the ordinary symbol in the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 is also configured to vary according to the variation type counter CS.

  Specifically, when the out-of-range fluctuation display is started in the first unit area 71, or in the other unit areas 72 and 73, the buffer value of the fluctuation type counter CS is obtained. Is done. Then, by referring to the variable display time table stored in the variable display time table storage area 222 provided in the ROM 203, the variable display time corresponding to the obtained value of the variable type counter CS is selected.

  The variable display time table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various variable display time tables. FIG. 10A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first table TD1, and FIG. 10B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second table TD2. FIG. 10C is an explanatory diagram for explaining the third table TD3.

  The variable display time table storage area 222 stores a plurality of variable display time tables corresponding to the unit areas 71 to 73. More specifically, the first table TD1 which is referred to when a normal symbol is fluctuated and displayed in the first unit area 71 in a situation where the lottery result of the support lottery based on winning in the first through gate 51 is a departure result. And a second table TD2 which is referred to when a normal symbol is variably displayed in the second unit area 72, and a third table TD3 which is referred to when a normal symbol is variably displayed in the third unit area 73. And are stored.

  The first table TD1 is referred to only when the lottery result of the support lottery based on winning in the first through gate 51 is an out-of-order result. As shown in FIG. Is a table in which the numerical range of the first unit area 71 is associated with the deviation change display time of the first unit area 71. Thus, the deviation display time of the first unit area 71 varies depending on the value of the variation type counter CS.

  As shown in FIGS. 10B and 10C, the second table TD2 and the third table TD3 are tables in which the numerical range of the variation type counter CS and the variation display time are associated with each other. In the second table TD2 and the third table TD3, the value range of the variation type counter CS and the type of the variation display time are set to be the same. On the other hand, the correspondence between the numerical range of the fluctuation type counter CS and the fluctuation display time is different.

  Specifically, 0.7 sec is associated with “0 to 79” of the variation type counter CS in the second table TD2, while 1.3 sec is associated with the third table TD3. In addition, 1.0 sec is associated with “80 to 159” of the variation type counter CS in the second table TD2, while 0.7 sec is associated with the third table TD3. Further, 1.3 sec is associated with “160 to 198” of the variation type counter CS in the second table TD2, while 1.0 sec is associated with the third table TD3.

  According to such a configuration, in a situation where the normal symbol of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 is displayed in a variable manner, the same fluctuation type counter CS is used to display the normal pattern in the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73. When determining the variable display time of a symbol, different variable display times are selected. This operation will be described later.

  Here, the relationship between the variable display time of the first unit area 71 and the variable display time of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 will be described. The winning fluctuation display time (0.5 sec) of the first unit area 71 is set shorter than the shortest fluctuation display time (0.7 sec) of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73. As a result, the winning variation display of the first unit area 71 is more likely to end before the variation display of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73.

  On the other hand, the shortest deviation display time (30 sec) of the first unit area 71 is set longer than the longest display time (1.3 sec) of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73. Thus, the variable display of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 can be easily ended before the deviation display of the first unit area 71 ends.

  The variable display time of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 may be made different depending on the lottery result of the support lottery. Specifically, the winning variation display time of the second unit region 72 and the third unit region 73 may be set shorter than the deviation variation display time of the second unit region 72 and the third unit region 73. Thereby, the support interval between the second electric accessory 42a and the third electric accessory 43a can be shortened, and the privilege given to the player can be increased.

  On the other hand, the winning variation display time of the second unit region 72 and the third unit region 73 may be set longer than the deviation variation display time of the second unit region 72 and the third unit region 73. Thereby, the support interval between the second electric accessory 42a and the third electric accessory 43a can be increased, and the privilege given to the player can be reduced.

  Further, in the second table TD2 and the third table TD3, the range of the numerical value related to the distribution of the variation type counter CS is set to be the same (0.7 sec to 1.3 sec), but is not limited to this. A configuration in which the numerical value ranges are different may be adopted.

  Further, the variable display time of the distribution destination is common (0.7 sec, 1.0 sec, 1.3 sec) in both the second table TD2 and the third table TD3, but different types of variable display times are distributed. The configuration set as the destination may be used. In the third table TD3, 0.8 sec, 0.9 sec, and 1.2 sec may be set as the fluctuation display time of the distribution destination.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 9, each of the electrical hand holding areas 231 to 233 will be described.

  First, the first electric charge holding area 231 will be described. The first electric utility holding area 231 includes a holding area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4, and is used for a lottery counter in accordance with a winning history to the first through gate 51. Numerical information of the first electrical combination counter C1 stored in the buffer 230 is stored in any of the holding areas RE1 to RE4. In this case, the first reserved area RE1 → the second reserved area RE2 → the third reserved area RE4 are provided in the first reserved area RE1 to the fourth reserved area RE4 when winnings to the first through gate 51 occur plural times consecutively. Each numerical information is stored in chronological order from the reserved area RE3 to the fourth reserved area RE4. By providing the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 in this manner, up to four winning histories of gaming balls to the first through gate 51 are held and stored.

  Further, the holding area RE includes a first holding number storage area N1, and specifies the number of the holding prize histories to the first through gate 51 in the first holding number storage area N1. Is stored. More specifically, any numerical value from 0 to 4 is stored in the first reserved number storage area N1. By grasping the numerical value, the winning history to the first through gate 51 is retained and stored. Figure out how many

  The execution area AE stores the numerical information of the first electric hand counter C1 stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE when starting the variable display of the first unit area 71 on the accessory display unit 62. It is an area to move.

  Next, the second power holding area 232 will be described. The second power role holding area 232, like the first power role holding area 231, includes a holding area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4, and is used for a lottery counter in accordance with a winning history to the second through gate 52. The numerical information of the second electric hand counter C2 stored in the buffer 230 is stored in any of the holding areas RE1 to RE4 in the holding area RE of the second electric hand holding area 232. In this case, in the first holding area RE1 to the fourth holding area RE4 in the holding area RE of the second electric charge holding area 232, if a winning in the second through gate 52 occurs continuously plural times, Each numerical information is stored in time series in the order of 1 reserved area RE1 → second reserved area RE2 → third reserved area RE3 → fourth reserved area RE4. By providing the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 in this manner, up to four winning histories of game balls to the second through gate 52 are held and stored.

  In addition, the holding area RE of the second electric charge holding area 232 includes a second holding number storage area N2, and the winning history to the second through gate 52 is held and stored in the second holding number storage area N2. The information for specifying the number of times is stored. More specifically, any numerical value from 0 to 4 is stored in the second reserved number storage area N2, and by grasping the numerical value, the winning history to the second through gate 52 is retained and stored. Figure out how many

  The execution area AE of the second power-holding area 232 is used to start the variable display of the second unit area 72 in the display unit 62 for the special purpose, and the first holding area RE of the second power-holding area 232 is first held. This is an area for moving the numerical information of the second electric win counter C2 stored in the area RE1.

  Next, the third power holding area 233 will be described. The third power role holding area 233, like the first power role holding area 231, includes a holding area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4. The holding area RE is used for a lottery counter according to the winning history of the third through gate 53. The numerical information of the third electric hand counter C3 stored in the buffer 230 is stored in one of the holding areas RE1 to RE4 in the holding area RE of the third electric hand holding area 233. In this case, in the first holding area RE1 to the fourth holding area RE4 in the holding area RE of the third power saving area 233, if a winning in the third through gate 53 occurs continuously plural times, Each numerical information is stored in time series in the order of 1 reserved area RE1 → second reserved area RE2 → third reserved area RE3 → fourth reserved area RE4. By providing the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 in this manner, up to four winning histories of game balls to the third through gate 53 are held and stored.

  Further, the holding area RE of the third electric charge holding area 233 includes a third holding number storage area N3, and the winning history to the third through gate 53 is held and stored in the third holding number storage area N3. The information for specifying the number of times is stored. In detail, any numerical value from 0 to 4 is stored in the third reserved number storage area N3, and by grasping the numerical value, the winning history to the third through gate 53 is retained and stored. Figure out how many

  The execution area AE of the third power role holding area 233 is used to start the variable display of the third unit area 73 in the display unit 62 for the special purpose, and the third holding area RE of the third power role holding area 233 is held. This is an area for moving the numerical information of the third electric win counter C3 stored in the area RE3.

  Here, as described above, while it is permitted for the game ball to pass through the second through gate 52 via the first through gate 51, the game ball is allowed to pass through the second through gate 52 without passing through the first through gate 51. It is difficult for game balls to pass. For this reason, an event in which the number of holds (the number of winning histories), which is the number of hold information held and stored in the first power saving area 231, is less likely to occur than the number of holds in the second power hold area 232 is unlikely to occur. .

  Further, it is difficult for a game ball to pass through the third through gate 53 without passing through the first through gate 51. For this reason, an event in which the number of holds (the number of winning histories), which is the number of pieces of hold information held and stored in the first power saving area 231, is less likely to occur than the number of holds in the third power hold area 233 is unlikely to occur. .

  Furthermore, since the number of holdings that can be held and held in each of the electric charge holding areas 231 to 233 is the same, it is assumed that the winning in each through gate 51 to 53 occurs more than the number of holdings that can be held and held. However, the above event does not occur.

  Note that the number of holds that can be held and stored in each of the election holding areas 231 to 233 is set to the same (four), but is not limited to this, and the winning history that can be stored in each of the election holding areas 231 to 233 is set. The number may be different. In this case, in order to suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned event, the number of times that the first electric role holding area 231 can be held and stored is changed to the number of times that the second electric role holding area 232 or the third electric role holding area 233 can be held and stored. It is better to set the same or more than (N1 ≧ N2 or N3).

<Regarding Various Processes Executed by Main Controller 101>
Next, a timer interrupt process and a normal process executed by the MPU 202 in the main control device 101 to advance a game in each game round will be described. In the MPU 202, in addition to the timer interrupt process and the normal process, a main process started upon power-on and an NMI interrupt process started by input of a power failure signal to an NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal) are executed. However, description of these processes is omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This process is started by the MPU 202 periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec).

  In step S101, various winning switches are read. That is, the state of the various switches connected to the main controller 101 is read, and the state of the switch is determined to store the detection information (winning detection information).

  Then, in step S102, the first electric win counter C1, the second electric win counter C2, and the third electric win counter C3 are updated. Specifically, the first electric-power counter C1, the second electric-power counter C2, and the third electric-power counter C3 are each incremented by one, and cleared to 0 when their counter values reach the maximum value. Then, the updated value of each of the electric hand counters C1 to C3 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204. After that, in step S103, after executing a prize winning process for a prize accompanying a prize to each of the through gates 51 to 53, the timer interrupt process is terminated.

  The winning processing for through in step S103 will be described below.

  In step S201, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won the first through gate 51. When it is determined that the game ball has not won the first through gate 51, the process proceeds to step S206, whereas when it is determined that the first through gate 51 has won, the process proceeds to step S202, and the first number of reserves is set. It is determined whether the storage area N1 is smaller than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment).

  If the first reserved number storage area N1 is equal to or larger than the upper limit, the process proceeds to step S206, while if the first reserved number storage area N1 is smaller than the upper limit, the process proceeds to step S203, and the first reserved number storage area N1. Is incremented by one.

  In the following step S204, the current value of the first electric hand counter C1 is stored in the first reserved area among the empty reserved areas of the first electric hand held area 231 of the RAM 204. In step S204, a command for specifying that the first electric combination counter C1 has been acquired is set and output to the sound emission control device 102. The voice light emission control device 102 controls the light emission of the first hold lamp unit 91 based on the reception of the command, specifically, the lamp corresponding to the hold area in which the first electric win counter C1 acquired this time is stored. A process for causing the unit to emit light is executed.

  After that, in step S205, a confirmation process for the suspension notice is executed, and the process proceeds to step S206. In the confirmation process for the suspension notice, command information that reflects a lottery result based on winning in the first through gate 51 is set.

  The confirmation process for the suspension notice will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S301, the value of the first electric win counter C1 acquired this time is grasped. After that, a support lottery process is executed in step S302. In the support lottery process, it is determined whether the first electric win counter C1 obtained in step S301 corresponds to a predetermined winning value. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the first electric win counter C1 is “7”.

  In a succeeding step S303, it is determined whether or not the lottery result in the step S302 is a winning result. If it is a winning result, the process proceeds to step S304, a winning hold command is set, and the confirmation process for the final notice is ended. On the other hand, when the result is not a winning result, specifically when the result is a departure result, a departure suspension command is set in step S305, and the confirmation processing for the preliminary reservation notice ends. These hold commands are transmitted to the sound emission control device 102 in step S401 of the normal processing (FIG. 14) described later. Based on the reception of each of these hold commands, the sound emission control device 102 grasps that the first electric utility counter C1 has been acquired and the lottery result of the support lottery (support lottery result).

  As described above, since the winning probability of the support lottery based on winning in the first through gate 51 is 240/241, the winning is almost completed.

  Returning to the description of the winning processing for through (FIG. 12), in step S206, it is determined whether or not the second through gate 52 has won. If it is determined that the game ball has not won the second through gate 52, the process proceeds to step S210, whereas if it is determined that the game ball has won the second through gate 52, the process proceeds to step S207, and the second number of reserves is determined. It is determined whether or not the storage area N2 is less than the upper limit value of 4.

  If the second reserved number storage area N2 is equal to or larger than the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S210. If the second reserved number storage area N2 is smaller than the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S208 and the second reserved number storage area. N2 is incremented by one. In the following step S209, the current value of the second electric hand counter C2 is stored in the first reserved area of the empty reserved areas of the second electric hand held area 232 of the RAM 204. In step S209, a command for specifying that the second electric combination counter C2 has been acquired is set and output to the sound emission control device 102. The sound emission control device 102 controls the emission of the second holding lamp unit 92 based on the reception of the command, specifically, the lamp corresponding to the holding area in which the currently acquired second electric win counter C2 is stored. A process for causing the unit to emit light is executed.

  In step S210, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the third through gate 53. If it is determined that the game ball has not won the third through gate 53, the prize-winning process for the through game is terminated, while if it is determined that the third through gate 53 has been won, the process proceeds to step S211. It is determined whether or not the third reserved number storage area N3 is less than the upper limit value of 4.

  If the third reserved number storage area N3 is equal to or larger than the upper limit value, the winning processing for the through processing is terminated as it is, while if the third reserved number storage area N3 is smaller than the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S212. , The third reserved number storage area N3 is incremented by one. In the following step S213, the current value of the third electric hand counter C3 is stored in the first reserved area of the empty reserved area of the third electric hand held area 233 of the RAM 204, and the winning processing for this through is ended. In step S213, a command for specifying that the third electric combination counter C3 has been acquired is set and output to the sound emission control device 102. The voice light emission control device 102 controls the light emission of the third holding lamp unit 93 based on the reception of the command, specifically, the lamp corresponding to the holding area in which the currently acquired third electric combination counter C3 is stored. A process for causing the unit to emit light is executed.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of the normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after a main process started upon power-on is executed. In the normal process, main processes of a game are executed. As an overview, the processing in steps S401 to S408 is executed as a periodic processing with a period of 4 msec, and the update processing of the fluctuation type counter CS in step S410 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the normal processing, in step S401, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt processing or the previous normal processing is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, it determines the presence or absence of a prize ball command, and if the prize ball command is set, transmits it to the payout control device 117. In addition, when effect commands such as various change commands, various hold commands, and release commands are set, the command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 102.

  Next, in step S402, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by one, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

  In a succeeding step S403, a process for demonstration display is executed. In the demonstration display processing, a determination processing is performed to determine whether or not a situation in which there is no winning in any of the through gates 51 to 53 has elapsed by a predetermined demonstration start wait time (for example, 5.0 sec). When it is determined that the time has elapsed, a command for demonstration display is transmitted to the sound emission control device 102. The sound emission control device 102 transmits the demo display command directly to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 81 based on the reception of the command for the demonstration display so that the image for the demonstration is displayed on the display screen G.

  After that, in steps S404 to S406, a power support process for controlling the driving of the accessory display unit 62 and the electric accessory 41a to 43a is executed.

  As already described, three unit areas 71 to 73 are formed in the accessory display unit 62, and each of the electric accessory 41 a to 43 a is provided in one-to-one correspondence with each of the unit areas 71 to 73. ing. For this reason, in the processing for supporting the electric hand, the processing for controlling the unit areas 71 to 73 and the electric power objects 41a to 43a is executed. In detail, based on the winning of the through gates 51 to 53, the variable display of each unit area 71 to 73 is started, and after the variable display time elapses, each of the through gates 51 to 53 is displayed for each of the unit areas 71 to 73. Then, a stop result corresponding to the support lottery result based on winning is displayed, and a process of terminating the variable display is executed. Then, if the support lottery result is a winning result, the support of each of the electric auditors goods 41a to 43a is started after the end of the fluctuation display (after the display of the stop result).

  Here, while the variable display of each of the unit areas 71 to 73 is performed independently, the support of each of the electric auditors 41a to 43a is different from the other electric auditors in a situation where the support of one electric auditor is performed. There is no support for things.

  Specifically, in a situation where the variable display is being performed in each of the unit areas 71 to 73, the winning variable display of one unit area ends, and the support of the electric accessory corresponding to the one unit area is started. On the basis of this, the variable display of the ordinary symbol in the other unit area is stopped. In detail, the variable display is not started when the variable display of the ordinary symbol is not performed in the other unit area, and the variable display is not performed when the variable display of the ordinary symbol is performed in the other unit area. The display is configured to be reset or paused. In this case, the resetting invalidates the variable display performed in another unit area and the lottery result that triggered the variable display, and the pause means that the variable display is performed in another unit area. This is to temporarily stop the counting of the variable display time in the displayed variable display. The suspension of the variable display is continued until the support of the electric accessory ends. As a result, the variable display does not end in another unit area, so that support for another electric accessory does not start.

  More specifically, in step S404, first, the electric power support process executes a first electric win corresponding process related to display control of the first unit area 71 and drive control of the first electric auditors product 41a. Then, in step S405, a second electric combination handling process related to display control of the second unit area 72 and drive control of the second electric accessory 42a is executed. After that, in step S406, a third electric combination handling process related to the display control of the third unit area 73 and the drive control of the third electric accessory 43a is executed. That is, in one processing cycle, the control of the variable display of the ordinary symbols is performed in the order of the first unit area 71 → the second unit area 72 → the third unit area 73.

  After execution of step S406, the process proceeds to step S407, in which game ball launch control processing is executed. In the game ball launch control process, the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 27 is excited once every predetermined period (for example, 0.6 sec) on condition that a launch permission signal is input from the power supply and the launch control device 118. . Thereby, the game ball is launched toward the game area.

  In a succeeding step S408, it is determined whether or not the power interruption flag is set (stored) in the RAM 204. The power interruption flag is a flag that is stored when occurrence of a power interruption is confirmed, and is deleted in the next main processing.

  If the power interruption flag is not stored, it means that the last processing of the plurality of processings to be repeatedly executed has been completed. Therefore, in step S409, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal processing has been reached. It is determined whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the normal processing. Then, the update of the fluctuation type counter CS is repeatedly executed within the remaining time until the next normal processing execution timing. That is, in step S410, the variation type counter CS is incremented by one, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

  Here, since the execution time of each processing of steps S401 to S408 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next execution timing of the normal processing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the variation type counter CS using the remaining time, the variation type counter CS can be updated at random.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S408 that the power interruption flag is stored, it means that power interruption has occurred, and the processing at the time of power interruption after step S411 is executed. That is, in step S411, the occurrence of the timer interrupt process is prohibited, then the RAM determination value is calculated and stored in step S412, and after the access to the RAM 204 is prohibited in step S413, the power is completely shut off and the process is performed. Continues an infinite loop until can no longer be executed.

<1st Electric Role Handling Process>
Next, the first electrical combination handling process will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  First, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the variable display of the first unit area 71 is stopped based on the support of another electric accessory, specifically, the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a. Is determined. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first stop flag is set in the stop flag storage area 234a provided in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. The first stopped flag is a flag for specifying that the variable display of the first unit area 71 is stopped, and when the support of the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a is started. And is deleted when the support ends.

  If the first stop flag is not set, the process advances to step S502 to determine whether the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a is being supported (opening / closing operation). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the second supported flag is set in the supported flag storage area 234b provided in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204, and whether the third supported flag is set. Determine whether or not. The second support flag is a flag that is set when the opening / closing operation of the second electric accessory 42a is performed and is cleared when the opening / closing operation ends. The third supported flag is a flag that is set when the opening and closing operation of the third electric auditors goods 43a is performed and is cleared when the opening and closing operation is completed, similarly to the second supported flag.

  When both support flags are not set, the processing related to the display control of the first unit area 71 and the drive control of the first electric accessory 41a is executed.

  Specifically, first, in step S503, it is determined whether or not the first unit area 71 is displaying a departure result. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the off-display flag is set in the off-display flag storage area 234c provided in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. The departure display flag is a flag that is set while the departure result is displayed in the first unit area 71. As described above, the departure result is displayed in the first unit area 71 when the first electric accessory 41a is not won in the support lottery for determining whether or not to open the first electric accessory 41a.

  If the off-display flag is not set, the process advances to step S504 to determine whether the first electric accessory 41a is being supported. Specifically, it is determined whether the first supported flag is set in the supported flag storage area 234b provided in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. The first support flag is set when the opening and closing operation of the first electric accessory 41a is performed, and is cleared when the opening and closing operation is completed.

  If the first support flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S505, and it is determined whether the first support winning flag is set in the support winning flag storage area 234d provided in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. I do. The first support winning flag is a flag that is set when a winning is performed in the support lottery related to the first electric auditors hand 41a and that is cleared when the first supporting flag is set.

  If the first support winning flag has not been set, the process proceeds to step S506, where the first timer counter T1 stored in the first timer counter area 235a provided in the various counter areas 235 of the RAM 204 is set to “0”. It is determined whether or not there is. The value of the first timer counter T1 is updated so that it is decremented by one each time the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11) is started at a cycle of 2 msec. If the first timer counter T1 is not "0", the first electric win handling process ends.

  If the first timer counter T1 is "0", the process proceeds to step S507, and it is determined whether or not the variation of the ordinary symbol is being displayed in the first unit area 71. If the variable display is not being performed, the process proceeds to step S508, where the first lottery C1 (holding information) stored in the first lottery holding area 231 is still subjected to the support lottery for the first electric auditors goods 41a. Then, it is determined whether or not there is any data. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the first reserved number storage area N1 is larger than “0”.

  When the value of the first reserved number storage area N1 is “0”, the first electric handset correspondence processing is terminated as it is, and when the value of the first reserved number storage area N1 is larger than “0”. Executes the first ordinary figure variation start process for starting the variation display of the ordinary symbol in the first unit area 71 in step S509, and terminates the first electrical role handling process.

  The first ordinary figure change start process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S601, a process of subtracting 1 from the first reserved number storage area N1 is executed. After that, data setting processing is executed in step S602. In the data setting process, a process of shifting the data stored in each of the reserved areas RE1 to RE4 in the first telephone combination reserved area 231 is executed. Specifically, the data in the first reserved area RE1 is moved to the execution area AE, and the second reserved area RE2 → the first reserved area RE1, the third reserved area RE3 → the second reserved area RE2, and the fourth reserved area RE4. → The data in each area is moved to the lower area side, such as the third reservation area RE3.

  In step S602, processing for setting a first shift command is executed. The shift command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 102 in step S401 of the normal processing (FIG. 14). The sound emission control device 102 controls the emission of the first hold lamp unit 91 based on the reception of the shift command.

  In a succeeding step S603, a support lottery process is executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the first electric winning counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is a predetermined winning value “7”. Then, in step S604, it is determined whether or not the determination result in step S603 is a winning result. If the result is a winning result, the flow advances to step S605 to set a first support winning flag.

  After that, in step S606, “250” is set in the first timer counter T1 as the winning variation display time of the first unit area 71. As described above, the value of the first timer counter T1 is decremented by one each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is started in a cycle of 2 msec. It is 5 seconds.

  After executing the processing in step S606, a winning fluctuation command is set in step S607. The winning fluctuation command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 102 in step S401 in the normal processing (FIG. 14). The process of the sound emission control device 102 upon receiving the selection change command will be described later.

  On the other hand, when the support lottery of the first electric accessory 41a has not been won, the process proceeds to step S608, and a variable display time lottery process of performing lottery on the deviating display time of the first unit area 71 is executed. In this process, the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is obtained, and the out-of-date fluctuation display time corresponding to the obtained value of the fluctuation type counter CS is grasped by referring to the first table TD1.

  In a succeeding step S609, a numerical value corresponding to the off-state fluctuation display time grasped in the fluctuation display time lottery process is set in the first timer counter T1. Specifically, for example, when 30 seconds is grasped as the deviation change display time, “15000” is set to the first timer counter T1.

  Then, in step S610, a deviation change command including information for specifying the deviation fluctuation display time is set. The deviation change command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 102 in step S401 in the normal processing (FIG. 14). The processing performed by the sound emission control device 102 upon receiving the deviation change command will be described later.

  After the processing in step S607 or step S610 is performed, in step S611, the variation display of the ordinary symbol in the first unit area 71 is started, and the first ordinary figure variation start process is ended.

  That is, when the first electric winning counter C1 is stored in the first electric winning holding area 231, the first electric winning counter C1 is used to execute a win / fail determination process (support lottery process). As a trigger, a normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In this case, the fluctuation display time of the ordinary symbol is determined based on the result of the determination of the success or failure (support lottery result) and the fluctuation type counter CS.

  Returning to the description of the first electric win handling process (FIG. 15), in a situation where the first support winning flag is not set, the first timer counter T1 is “0” and the first unit area 71 is displaying a variable display. In this case (step S505: NO, step S506: YES, step S507: YES), it means that the deviation change display of the first unit area 71 has been completed. In this case, in step S510, a departure result is stopped and displayed in the first unit area 71 as a stop result.

  In a succeeding step S511, a disconnection display flag is set. This allows the MPU 202 to specify that the departure result is being displayed in the first unit area 71.

  In step S511, a departure change end command is set. Then, the first electronic role handling process ends. The deviation change end command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 102 in step S401 in the normal processing (FIG. 14). The sound emission control device 102 can recognize that the display of the deviation fluctuation of the first unit area 71 has been completed based on the reception of the deviation fluctuation end command.

  If the first support winning flag is set (step S505: YES), it is determined in step S512 whether the first timer counter T1 is “0”. If the first timer counter T1 is not "0", the first electric win handling process ends. On the other hand, if the first timer counter T1 is “0”, it means that the winning variation display of the first unit area 71 has been completed. In this case, the winning result is stopped and displayed in the first unit area 71 as a stopping result in step S513.

  Then, in step S514, the first support flag is set, and the first support winning flag is deleted.

  In a succeeding step S515, a process for starting the opening / closing operation of the first electric accessory 41a is executed. Specifically, the first electric accessory drive unit 41b is controlled so that the first electric accessory 41a is opened.

  After that, in step S516, "3000" is set in the first timer counter T1 as an opening time (time during which the first electric accessory 41a is open). Thereby, 6 sec is set as the opening time of the first electric accessory 41a. Then, "10" is set to the count counter CC stored in the count counter area 235b provided in the various counter areas 235 of the RAM 204. The count counter CC is a counter for ascertaining the number of gaming balls that have won the first electric win prize port 41 in a situation where the first electric auditors hand 41a is in the open state.

  After that, an open command is set in step S517, and the first electric win handling process ends. The release command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 102 in step S401 in the normal processing (FIG. 14). The processing of the sound emission control device 102 upon receiving the release command will be described later.

  If the off-display flag is not set and the first support flag is set (step S503: NO, step S504: YES), the first electric utility opening / closing process is executed in step S518, and The electric role handling process ends.

  The first electric utility opening / closing process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S701, it is determined whether the first timer counter T1 is "0". If the first timer counter T1 is "0", the process proceeds to step S705, while if the first timer counter T1 is not "0", the process proceeds to step S702, where the winning in the first winning combination 41 is determined. It is determined whether or not it has occurred. If no winning has occurred in the first electric winning opening 41, the first electric opening / closing process is terminated as it is, while if a winning has occurred in the first electric winning opening 41, the process proceeds to step S703. , A process of subtracting 1 from the count counter CC.

  Thereafter, it is determined in step S704 whether or not the count counter CC is “0”. Since the count counter CC is set to “10” as an initial value based on the fact that the first electric accessory 41a is in the open state, the process in step S704 determines that the first electric accessory 41a is in the open state. In this situation, it can be said that it is a process of determining whether or not the number of gaming balls that have won the first electric winning opening 41 has reached a predetermined upper limit value (specifically, 10).

  If the count counter CC is not "0", the first electric utility opening / closing process is terminated as it is, while if the count counter CC is "0", the flow proceeds to step S705. In step S705, a process of controlling the first electric accessory drive unit 41b to execute the first electric accessory 41a in the closed state is executed.

  In the following step S706, the first supported flag is erased in order to specify that the support of the first electric accessory 41a has ended.

  Thereafter, in step S707, a close command is set, and the first electric utility opening / closing process ends. The close command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 102 in step S401 in the normal processing (FIG. 14). The process of the sound emission control device 102 upon receiving the close command will be described later.

  According to this processing, the support of the first electric auditors product 41a (opening of the first electric auditors product 41a) is (A) a predetermined time (6 sec) has elapsed, or (B) the first electric auditors winning. The process is terminated when one of the following events occurs: the winning number of the mouth 41 reaches a predetermined upper limit number (10).

  Here, as described above, winning in the first winning combination 41 is prohibited by the first specific regulation nail 64c. As a result, the event (B) cannot occur. Therefore, the opening time of the first electric combination 41a is 6 seconds without changing according to the winning situation.

  Returning to the description of the first electric combination handling process (FIG. 15), when a deviation result is displayed in the first unit area 71, an affirmative determination is made in step S503, and the deviation display correspondence process is executed in step S519. Then, the first electric role handling process ends. That is, when the departure result is being displayed in the first unit area 71, the processing of steps S504 to S518 is not performed. In other words, when the departure result is being displayed in the first unit area 71, the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol in the first unit area 71 is not started, and the opening and closing operation of the first electric accessory 41a is performed. Absent.

  The out-of-display processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  The off-display processing is processing for waiting for the start of the next fluctuating display until a predetermined time has elapsed from the end of the off-variation display in the first unit area 71. If the variable display is performed in the second unit area 72 or the third unit area 73 at the end timing of the deviation display, the variable display and the support based on the variable display are executed during the predetermined time. Then, an effect on the ending and the next variable display is performed.

  First, in step S801, it is determined whether the standby flag is set in the standby flag storage area 234e provided in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204. During the display of the departure result, the standby flag ends the change display of the ordinary symbol in the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 and the opening / closing operation of the second electric accessory 42a and the third electric accessory 43a. This flag is set when the ending is completed, and thereafter, is cleared when the time required for the ending and the effect relating to the next variable display has elapsed for notifying that the advantageous state for the player has ended.

  If the standby flag has not been set, the process proceeds to step S802, and it is determined whether any one of the variable display of the normal symbol in the second unit area 72 and the variable display of the normal symbol in the third unit area 73 is performed. judge.

  Here, when the departure result is displayed in the first unit area 71, a new variable display is not started in the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73. Furthermore, in step S502 (or step S523) of the first electric combination handling process (FIG. 15), it is determined whether any of the support of the second electric combination 42a and the support of the third electric combination 43a is performed. Is determined, and when none of the support is performed, the out-of-display processing is executed. For this reason, it can be said that the process of step S802 is a process of determining whether or not the display of the variation of the normal symbol and the support based on the variation display, which have been performed at the end timing of the variation display, have ended.

  If the variable display is being performed in the second unit area 72 or the third unit area 73, the off-display processing is terminated. On the other hand, when the fluctuation display of both the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 is not performed, the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol and the support based on the fluctuation display, which are performed at the end timing of the deviation fluctuation display, are ended. Means you did. In this case, the process proceeds to step S803, and a standby flag is set.

  In the following step S804, "4000" is set to the first timer counter T1 as a standby time until the next variable display is started in the first unit area 71. As a result, 8 seconds are set as the standby time from the timing when the above operations are completed to the timing when the variable display in the first unit area 71 is started. An effect relating to ending and the next variable display is performed using the standby time.

  Then, the ending command is set in step S805, and the out-of-office display corresponding processing is terminated. The ending command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 102 in step S401 in the normal processing (FIG. 14). The process of the sound emission control device 102 upon receiving the ending command will be described later.

  On the other hand, if the standby flag has been set, it is determined in step S806 whether the standby time has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first timer counter T1 is “0”. If the first timer counter T1 is not "0", it means that the waiting time has not elapsed. In this case, the out-of-place display corresponding process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the first timer counter T1 is "0", it means that the standby time has elapsed. In this case, the out-of-display flag is cleared in step S807, the standby flag is cleared, and the out-of-display display processing ends.

  According to this processing, the next variation display with respect to the deviation variation display of the first unit area 71 is the normal symbol variation display and the variation display performed at the end timing after the deviation variation display ends. The support based on the variable display ends, and does not start until the timing when the standby time elapses thereafter. This makes it possible to execute the display of the variation of the ordinary symbol and the support based on the variation display, which were performed at the end timing of the variation display, between the variation display and the next variation display. At the same time, it is possible to perform an effect related to the ending and the next variable display in the first unit area 71.

  The details of the ending and the effect related to the next variable display in the first unit area 71 will be described together with the processing executed by the sound emission control device 102.

  Returning to the description of the first electric combination handling process (FIG. 15), if the second supported flag or the third supported flag is set (step S502: YES), the process proceeds to step S520 to step S522. When the variation display of the ordinary symbol is not performed in the one unit area 71, the variation display of the ordinary symbol is prevented from newly starting in the first unit area 71, and the variation of the ordinary symbol is prevented in the first unit area 71. If the display is being performed, a process of temporarily stopping the variable display is executed.

  Specifically, first, it is determined in step S520 whether the variable display is being performed in the first unit area 71. If the variable display is being performed in the first unit area 71, the process proceeds to step S521, and a temporary stop process for maintaining the remaining variable display time of the variable display and the support lottery result related to the variable display at the present time is executed.

  Specifically, updating of the first timer counter T1 is prohibited. As a result, the current first timer counter T1 is maintained. If the first support winning flag is set, the first support winning flag is maintained.

  Then, the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol performed in the first unit area 71 is temporarily stopped. In this case, both "O" and "X" ordinary symbols are displayed blinking simultaneously.

  If the variable display is not being performed in the first unit area 71, or after the processing of step S521 is performed, the first stop flag is set in step S522, and the first electric win handling processing is performed. finish.

  If the normal symbol variation display in the first unit area 71 is stopped (step S501: YES), it is determined in step S523 whether the second supported flag or the third supported flag is set. If either one of the both support flags is set, the first electric role handling process is terminated as it is. If the both support flags are not set, the process proceeds to steps S524 to S526. Then, a process for canceling the stop of the variable display of the first unit area 71 is executed. In this case, when the variable display of the first unit area 71 is temporarily stopped, the display is resumed from the temporarily stopped state.

  Specifically, first, in step S524, it is determined whether updating of the first timer counter T1 is prohibited. If the update of the first timer counter T1 is not prohibited, the process proceeds directly to step S526, while if the update of the first timer counter T1 is prohibited, the process proceeds to step S525 and the process proceeds to step S525. The prohibition of the update is released, and the variable display of the ordinary symbol is restarted. Thus, the update of the first timer counter T1 is restarted.

  In step S526, the first stop flag is deleted. Then, the process proceeds to step S503.

  That is, when the support of the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a is started in a state where the normal symbol is displayed in the first unit area 71, the normal symbol to be stopped is displayed. The count of the variable display time is temporarily stopped while the support lottery result related to the variable display is maintained. Then, based on the end of the support, the counting of the variable display time is restarted.

  Incidentally, when the processing related to the stop release (Steps S524 to S526) is executed, the process proceeds to Step S503, so that the stop release and the start of the variable display can be performed in the same processing cycle. Thereby, when the support of the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a is finished, the change display of the first unit area 71 is displayed later than the change display of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73. Getting started has been avoided.

  More specifically, when the support of the second electric accessory 42a is completed in a predetermined number of times of the normal processing, the stop release of the variable display of the normal symbol is executed in the third electric combination corresponding processing of the predetermined number of times. It is configured to be. Then, the stop of the ordinary symbol is executed in the first electric win corresponding processing in the next processing time with respect to the predetermined processing time, and the variable display of the first unit area 71 can be started. Then, in the second processing, the variable display of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 is started in the second and third electric win handling processes executed after the first electric winning handling process. Can be done.

  In addition, when the support of the third electric auditors goods 43a is ended in a predetermined processing cycle of the normal processing, the display of the variation of the normal symbol is stopped in the first processing of the next electric cycle with respect to the predetermined processing cycle. Release is performed, and the variable display of the first unit area 71 can be started. Then, in the second processing, the variable display of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 is started in the second and third electric win handling processes executed after the first electric winning handling process. Can be done.

  According to such a configuration, the winning fluctuation display time is set to be the same in the first unit area 71, the second unit area 72, and the third unit area 73, and the support of one electric accessory ends. Even if the stop of the variable display of each of the unit areas 71 to 73 is released based on the above, the variable display of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 ends before the first unit area 71. There is no.

  In addition, after execution of the process related to the suspension release, the first electric combination handling process may be terminated as it is. In this case, the processing load for one processing can be reduced. However, if the winning variable display time is the same in the first unit area 71, the second unit area 72, and the third unit area 73, and the variable display of each of the unit areas 71 to 73 is started at the same time, the second unit area In view of the fact that the variable display of the 72 and the third unit area 73 may end before the first unit area 71, the above configuration is superior.

  In addition, when the variable display of the first unit area 71 is stopped, the first timer counter T1 at the present time is temporarily stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 204, and when the stop of the variable display of the first unit area 71 is released, the first timer counter T1 is temporarily stored. The configuration may be such that the stored first timer counter T1 is reset for the first timer counter T1.

<Second electrical activity handling process>
Next, the second electric win handling process will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  First, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the variable display of the second unit area 72 is stopped based on the support of another electric accessory, specifically, the first electric accessory 41a or the third electric accessory 43a. Is determined. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the second stop flag is set in the stop flag storage area 234a provided in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. The second stopped flag is a flag for specifying that the variable display of the second unit area 72 is stopped, and when the support of the first electric accessory 41a or the third electric accessory 43a is started. And is deleted when the support ends.

  If the second stop flag is not set, the process advances to step S902 to determine whether the first electric accessory 41a or the third electric accessory 43a is being supported. Specifically, it is determined whether the first supported flag or the third supported flag is set.

  When the both support flags are not set, the processing related to the display control of the second unit area 72 and the drive control of the second electric accessory 42a is executed.

  Specifically, first, in step S903, it is determined whether the second electric accessory 42a is being supported. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the second support flag is set.

  If the second support flag is not set, the process advances to step S904 to determine whether the second support winning flag is set in the support winning flag storage area 234d provided in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. I do. The second support winning flag is a flag that is set when a winning is performed in a support lottery for determining whether to perform the opening and closing operation of the second electric accessory 42a, and that is cleared when the second supporting flag is set.

  If the second support winning flag has not been set, the process proceeds to step S905, and the second timer counter T2 stored in the second timer counter area 235c provided in the various counter areas 235 of the RAM 204 is “0”. It is determined whether or not. The second timer counter T2 is updated so that the value is decremented by one each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is started at a cycle of 2 msec. If the second timer counter T2 is not "0", the second electric win handling process ends.

  If the second timer counter T2 is "0", it is determined in step S906 whether or not the second unit area 72 is displaying a normal symbol in a variable manner. If the variation display is not being performed, the process proceeds to step S907, and the second lottery counter C2 (holding information) stored in the second lottery holding area 232 determines that the target of the support lottery of the second motor combination 42a is not yet determined. Then, it is determined whether or not there is any data. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the second reserved number storage area N2 is larger than “0”.

  If the value of the second reserved number storage area N2 is “0”, the second electric hand handling process is terminated as it is, while if the value of the second reserved number storage area N2 is larger than “0”. Determines in step S908 whether or not a departure result is being displayed in the first unit area 71. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the out-of-display flag is set.

  If the out-of-display flag is not set, the flow advances to step S909 to execute a second ordinary figure variation start process for starting variation display of ordinary symbols in the second unit area 72. The winning combination process ends.

  The second ordinary figure change start process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the processing of steps S1001 to S1004 is the same as the processing of steps S601 to S604 of the first ordinary figure change start processing (FIG. 16), and thus detailed description is omitted.

  If the current support lottery is a winning, a positive determination is made in step S1004, and the process proceeds to step S1005. In step S1005, the second support winning flag is set, and “2” is set in the round counter RC provided in the round counter area 235d provided in the various counter areas 235 of the RAM 204. The round counter RC is a counter for defining the number of times (the number of times of opening) the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a is opened in one opening / closing operation.

  After the execution of step S1005 or when making a negative determination in step S1004, in step S1006, a variable display time lottery process of determining the variable display time of the ordinary symbol in the second unit area 72 by lottery is executed. Specifically, by acquiring the current value of the variation type counter CS and referring to the second table TD2, the variation display time corresponding to the acquired variation type counter CS is grasped.

  Then, in step S1007, a value corresponding to the lottery result in step S1006 is set in the second timer counter T2. Specifically, for example, when the lottery result in step S1006 is 1.0 sec, “500” is set to the second timer counter T2. After that, in step S1008, the variation display of the second unit area 72 is started, and the second ordinary figure variation start process ends.

  Returning to the description of the second electric win handling process (FIG. 19), when the off display flag is set, an affirmative determination is made in step S908, and the second electric win handling process ends as it is. As a result, the second ordinary figure change start process is not executed. Therefore, in the situation where the departure result is displayed in the first unit area 71, the variable display of the second unit area 72 is not newly started.

  When the second support winning flag is not set and the second timer counter T2 is "0" and the ordinary symbol is being displayed in a variable manner in the second unit area 72 (step S904: NO, step S905: YES, (Step S906: YES), which means that the deviation change display of the second unit area 72 has been completed. In this case, the result of the departure is stopped and displayed in the second unit area 72 in step S910, and the second electric win handling process ends.

  If the second support winning flag is set (step S904: YES), the process proceeds to step S911, and it is determined whether the second timer counter T2 is "0". If the second timer counter T2 is not "0", the second electric win handling process ends.

  On the other hand, when the second timer counter T2 is “0”, it means that the winning variation display of the second unit area 72 has been completed. In this case, the winning result is stopped and displayed in the second unit area 72 in step S912.

  In a succeeding step S913, the second support flag is set, and the second support winning flag is deleted. Thereafter, in step S914, "10" is set in the count counter CC as the upper limit value of the number of game balls to be awarded in the second electric winning opening 42, and the second electric winning handling process ends.

  If the second support flag is set (step S903: YES), the process proceeds to step S915, executes the second electric-power opening / closing process, and ends the second electric-power handling process. The second electric utility opening / closing process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  The opening / closing operation (support) of the second electric accessory 42a is performed in such a manner that after a short time opening in which the second electric accessory 42a is opened for a relatively short time is performed, a predetermined interval time elapses. The configuration is such that the second electric accessory 42a is opened for a long time longer than the time opening.

  Specifically, first, in step S1101, it is determined whether the second electric accessory 42a is being opened (open state). If the second electric accessory 42a is not being opened, the process advances to step S1102 to determine whether the second timer counter T2 is "0". If the second timer counter T2 is not "0", the second electric utility opening / closing process is terminated as it is, while if the second timer counter T2 is "0", the process proceeds to step S1103, where the second electric accessory is operated. A process for controlling the second electric accessory drive unit 42b so as to open the 42a is executed.

  Specifically, it is determined in step S1104 whether or not the round counter RC is “2”. Since “2” is set as the initial value of the round counter RC, if the round counter RC is “2”, it means that the current release is the first (first) release. In this case, a count stop command is set in step S1105. The count stop command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 102 in step S401 in the normal processing (FIG. 14). The processing of the sound emission control device 102 upon receiving the count stop command will be described later.

  After that, in step S1106, the second timer counter T2 is set to "250", and the second electric utility opening / closing process ends. On the other hand, if the round counter RC is not “2”, in step S1107, “2750” is set in the second timer counter T2 as the release time of the long-time release (second release), and the second electric The opening / closing process ends.

  If the second electric accessory 42a is not being opened, the process advances to step S1108 to determine whether the second timer counter T2 is "0". If the second timer counter T2 is "0", the process proceeds to step S1109 to execute a process of controlling the second electric accessory drive unit 42b so that the second electric accessory 42a is closed.

  Then, in step S1110, an update process of subtracting 1 from the round counter RC is executed.

  Then, in a step S1111, it is determined whether or not the round counter RC is “0”. If the round counter RC is “0”, the process proceeds to step S1117, while if the round counter RC is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S1112, the second timer counter T2 is set to “500”, and the second The electronic opening / closing process ends.

  On the other hand, if the second timer counter T2 is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S1113, and a process is performed to determine whether or not a prize has occurred in the second prize hole 42. When the winning in the second electric winning opening 42 has not occurred, the second electric winning opening / closing process is terminated as it is, whereas when the winning in the second electric winning opening 42 has occurred, the process proceeds to step S1114. Then, an update process for subtracting 1 from the count counter CC is performed.

  In a succeeding step S1115, it is determined whether or not the count counter CC is “0”. If the count counter CC is not "0", the second electric utility opening / closing process is terminated as it is, while if the count counter CC is "0", the second electric accessory 42a is closed in step S1116. A process for controlling the second electric accessory drive unit 42b is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1117.

  In step S1117, a process of ending the support of the second electric accessory 42a is executed. Specifically, the second support flag is deleted. Then, in step S1118, a count restart command is set, and the second electric utility opening / closing process ends. This count restart command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 102 in step S401 in the normal processing (FIG. 14). The process of the sound emission control device 102 upon receiving the count restart command will be described later.

  According to this processing, when the support of the second electric auditors product 42a is started, first, the second electric auditors product 42a is opened for a short time. The opening time of the short-time opening is set to 0.5 sec. After the short-time opening is completed, the second electric accessory 42a is closed. The closing is continued for 1 second. Then, after the elapse of the time, the second electric accessory 42a is opened for a long time.

  The support of the second electric accessory 42a is (A) the opening time of the second electric accessory 42a, specifically, a combination of the opening time of the short-time opening and the opening time of the long-time opening is predetermined. Either the upper limit opening time (0.5 sec + 5.5 sec = 6.0 sec) or (B) the number of game balls that have won the second electric win winning opening 42 becomes a predetermined upper limit number (10). It continues until either event occurs. Thereby, the privilege given to the player can be adjusted, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the support does not end due to the game ball not winning.

  In this case, since the opening time of the short-time opening is set to be shorter than 0.6 seconds, which is the firing cycle of the game ball, after the short-time opening is started, the game is directed toward the second electric winning opening 42. Even if the ball is fired, the event that the game ball wins while the game ball is opened for a short time is unlikely to occur.

  Further, since the interval time is set to be longer than the firing cycle of the game balls, the game balls are fired at least once during the interval time.

  Returning to the description of the second electric combination handling process (FIG. 19), if the first supported flag or the third supported flag is set, the determination in step S902 is affirmative. Then, in steps S916 to S920, if the variable display of the ordinary symbol is not performed in the second unit area 72, the variable display of the ordinary symbol is not newly started in the second unit area 72, When the variable display of the ordinary symbol is performed in the second unit area 72, a process of resetting (invalidating) or temporarily stopping the variable display is executed.

  Specifically, first, in step S916, it is determined whether or not the variable display is being performed in the second unit area 72. If the variable display has not been performed, the second stop flag is set in step S920, and the second electric win handling process ends. As a result, the second ordinary symbol change start process is not executed in the second electric win handling process (FIG. 19), so that a new normal symbol change display is not started in the second unit area 72.

  On the other hand, when the variable display is being performed in the second unit area 72, the process proceeds to step S917, and it is determined whether the first supported flag is set.

  If the first supported flag is set, the process proceeds to step S918, in which the variation of the ordinary symbol currently performed in the second unit area 72 and the support lottery result related to the variation display are reset. Execute reset processing. Specifically, the second timer counter T2 is initialized to “0”. Further, the variation display of the ordinary symbol is terminated without displaying the stop result. If the second support win flag is set, the second support win flag is deleted.

  Thereafter, the second stop flag is set in step S920, and the second electric win handling process ends.

  If the first supported flag is not set, it means that the third supported flag is set. In this case, in step S919, a temporary stop process for maintaining the remaining variable display time of the variable display of the second unit area 72 at the present time and the support lottery result related to the variable display is executed. Specifically, the updating of the second timer counter T2 is prohibited, and the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol is temporarily stopped. When the second support winning flag is set, the second support winning flag is maintained.

  After that, the second stop flag is set in step S920, and the second electric win handling process ends.

  If the normal symbol variation display in the second unit area 72 is stopped (step S901: YES), it is determined in step S921 whether the first supported flag or the third supported flag is set. If any one of the both support flags is set, the second electric role handling process is terminated as it is. If both support flags are not set, the process proceeds to steps S922 to S924. Then, a process for canceling the suspension of the variable display of the second unit area 72 is executed.

  Specifically, first, in step S922, it is determined whether the update of the second timer counter T2 is prohibited. If the update of the second timer counter T2 is not prohibited, the process proceeds directly to step S924. If the update of the second timer counter T2 is prohibited, the process proceeds to step S923 to update the second timer counter T2. Is released, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is restarted.

  Then, the second suspension flag is deleted in step S924, and the second electric win handling process ends.

  According to this processing, when the support of the first electric accessory 41a is started in a situation where the variation of the ordinary symbol is displayed in the second unit area 72, the variation of the ordinary symbol currently performed is displayed. Is reset. Specifically, the change display of the ordinary symbol that is currently being performed is immediately terminated, and the support lottery result related to the change display is deleted. As a result, after the suspension of the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbols in the second unit area 72 is released, the second unit area 72 is based on the second electric hand counter C2 stored in the second electric hand holding area 232. Normally, a variable display of the symbol is newly performed.

  On the other hand, when the support of the third electric auditors goods 43a is started in a situation where the variation display of the ordinary symbol is performed in the second unit area 72, the support lottery result related to the variation display of the stop target is maintained. Stops the counting of the variable display time. Then, the counting of the variable display time is restarted based on the end of the support of the third electric combination 43a.

<Third electric role handling process>
Next, the third electrical combination handling process will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  First, in step SS1201, it is determined whether or not the variable display of the third unit area 73 is being stopped based on the support of the first electric auditors hand 41a or the second electric auditors hand 42a. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the third stop flag is set in the stop flag storage area 234a provided in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. The third stopped flag is a flag for specifying that the variable display of the third unit area 73 is stopped, and when the support of the first motor-driven accessory 41a or the second motor-driven accessory 42a is started. And is deleted when the support ends.

  If the third stop flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S1202, and it is determined whether the first electric accessory 41a or the second electric accessory 42a is being supported. Specifically, it is determined whether the first supported flag or the second supported flag is set.

  If the both-supported flag is not set, processing related to display control of the third unit area 73 and drive control of the third electric accessory 43a is executed.

  Specifically, first, it is determined in step S1203 whether the third electric accessory 43a is being supported. Specifically, it is determined whether the third support flag is set.

  If the third support flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S1204, and it is determined whether the third support win flag is set in the support win flag storage area 234d provided in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204. I do. The third support winning flag is a flag that is set when a winning is performed in a support lottery for determining whether to perform the opening and closing operation of the third electric accessory 43a, and that is cleared when the third supporting flag is set.

  If the third support winning flag has not been set, the process proceeds to step S1205, and the third timer counter T3 stored in the third timer counter area 235e provided in the various counter areas 235 of the RAM 204 is "0". It is determined whether or not. The third timer counter T3 is updated so that it is decremented by one each time the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11) is started at a cycle of 2 msec. If the third timer counter T3 is not "0", the third electric win handling process ends.

  If the third timer counter T3 is "0", it is determined in step S1206 whether or not the variable display of the ordinary symbol is being displayed in the third unit area 73. If the variable display is not being performed, the process proceeds to step S1207, and the third lottery counter C3 (hold information) stored in the third lottery holding area 233 is set as a target for the support lottery of the third electric auditors goods 43a. Then, it is determined whether or not there is any data. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the third reserved number storage area N3 is larger than “0”.

  If the value of the third pending number storage area N3 is “0”, the third electric handset handling process is terminated as it is, while if the value of the third pending number storage area N3 is larger than “0”. In step S1208, it is determined whether a departure result is being displayed in the first unit area 71. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the out-of-display flag is set.

  If the out-of-display flag is set, the third electric win handling process is terminated. If the out-of-display flag is set, the process proceeds to step S1209, where the third unit area 73 is displayed. A third ordinary figure variation start process for starting the variation display of the normal symbol is executed, and the third electric role handling process ends. The third general-purpose change start process is the same as the second general-purpose change start process (FIG. 20), and thus a detailed description is omitted.

  Here, the second general-figure change start processing and the third general-figure change start processing may be executed in the same processing cycle of the normal processing (FIG. 14). In this case, the lottery of the fluctuation display time is performed using the same fluctuation type counter CS.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the second table TD2 and the third table TD3 differ in the variable display time associated with the value of the variable type counter CS. Accordingly, different variable display times are selected in the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 even when the same variation type counter CS is used.

  In a situation where the third support winning flag is not set, when the third timer counter T3 is "0" and the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner in the third unit area 73 (step S1204: NO, step S1205: YES, (Step S1206: YES), which means that the normal symbol deviation change display has been completed in the third unit area 73. In this case, the result of the departure is stopped and displayed in the third unit area 73 in step S1210, and the third electric win handling process ends.

  If the third support winning flag has been set (step S1204: YES), the process proceeds to step S1211 to determine whether the third timer counter T3 is "0". If the third timer counter T3 is not "0", the third electric win handling process ends.

  On the other hand, when the third timer counter T3 is “0”, it means that the winning variation display of the ordinary symbol in the third unit area 73 has been completed. In this case, the winning result is stopped and displayed in the third unit area 73 in step S1212.

  In a succeeding step S1213, the third support flag is set, and the third support winning flag is deleted.

  Then, in step S1214, the count counter CC is set to “10” as the upper limit value of the number of game balls to be won in the third winning combination 43, and the third electric winning handling process ends.

  If the third support flag is set (step S1203: YES), the process proceeds to step S1215, where the third electric-power opening / closing process is executed, and the third electric-power handling process ends. The third electric utility opening / closing process is basically the same as the second electric utility opening / closing process (FIG. 21), and thus the description is omitted.

  If the first supported flag or the second supported flag is set, in steps S1216 to S1220, if the variation display of the ordinary symbol is not performed in the third unit area 73, the third symbol is displayed. In the unit area 73, the process of preventing the variable display of the normal symbol from being newly started and executing the process of resetting or temporarily stopping the variable display when the variable display of the normal symbol is performed in the third unit region 73 is executed. I do. This process is basically the same as step S916 to step S920 of the second electric win handling process (FIG. 19), and thus the description is omitted.

  In addition, when the variation display of the ordinary symbol in the third unit area 73 is stopped (step S1201: YES), it is determined whether the first supported flag or the second supported flag is set in step S1221. I do. If any one of the both support flags is set, the third electric role handling process is terminated as it is. If the both support flags are not set, the process proceeds to steps S1222 to S1224. Then, a process for canceling the stop of the variable display of the third unit area 73 is executed. This processing is basically the same as step S922 to step S924 of the second electric win handling processing (FIG. 19), and thus the description is omitted.

  According to this processing, when the support of the first electric accessory 41a is started in a situation in which the normal symbol variation display is performed in the third unit area 73, the normal symbol variation display currently performed is performed. Is reset. Specifically, the change display of the ordinary symbol that is currently being performed is immediately terminated, and the support lottery result related to the change display is deleted. As a result, after the suspension of the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol in the third unit area 73 is released, the third unit area 73 is based on the third electric hand counter C3 stored in the third electric hand holding area 233. Normally, a variable display of the symbol is newly performed.

  On the other hand, when the support of the second electric accessory 42a is started in a situation where the variation display of the ordinary symbol is performed in the third unit area 73, a state in which the support lottery result related to the variation display of the stop target is maintained. Stops the counting of the variable display time. Then, the counting of the variable display time is restarted based on the end of the support of the second electric accessory 42a.

<About the flow of the game>
Next, the flow of the game, specifically, the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbols in each of the unit areas 71 to 73 and the operation of each of the electric auditors products 41a to 43a will be described using the timing chart of FIG. (A) to (c) show winning in each of the through gates 51 to 53, (d) to (f) show the execution timing of the variable display of the normal symbol in each of the unit areas 71 to 73, and (g) to (H) shows the opening / closing state of each of the electric accessory 41a to 43a.

  First, a gaming ball wins in the first through gate 51 at the timing of t1 in a situation where the respective holding information, specifically, the respective electric winning counters C1 to C3 are not acquired in the respective electric winning holding areas 231 to 233. . Thereby, the first electric win counter C1 is obtained, the support lottery using the first electric win counter C1 is performed, and the variable display is started in the first unit area 71. The support lottery result is a winning result. In this case, 0.5 second is set as the winning variation display time of the first unit area 71.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t2, the game ball that has won the first through gate 51 wins the second through gate 52. Thereby, the second electric win counter C2 is obtained, the support lottery using the second electric win counter C2 is performed, and the variable display is started in the second unit area 72.

  That is, when the hold information has not been acquired in each of the electric charge holding areas 231 to 233, the variable display of the ordinary symbol in each of the unit areas 71 to 73 is sequentially started at the acquired timing. In this case, the first through gate 51 is disposed on the upstream side with respect to the second through gate 52 and the third through gate 53, and further, without passing through the first through gate 51, the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53. Since the winning of the gate 53 is regulated, the acquisition timing of the first electric win counter C1 is unlikely to be later than the acquisition timing of the other electric win counters C2 and C3. For this reason, in the situation where the variable display of the ordinary symbol is not performed in each of the unit areas 71 to 73, the variable display in the second unit area 72 or the third unit area 73 is performed before the variable display in the first unit area 71. Initiated events are unlikely to occur.

  Thereafter, the winning variation display of the first unit area 71 ends at the timing of t3.

  Here, the longest time from the passage timing of the first through gate 51 to the passage timing of the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53 is shorter than the winning variation display time (0.5 sec) of the first unit area 71. As described above, the distances between the first through gate 51, the second through gate 52, and the third through gate 53 are set. The shortest fluctuation display time (0.7 sec) of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 is set longer than the winning fluctuation display time (0.5 sec) of the first unit area 71. Thereby, the variable display of the second unit area 72 or the third unit area 73 is easily started during the winning variable display of the first unit area 71, and during the variable display of the second unit area 72 or the third unit area 73. The winning variation display of the first unit area 71 is easily ended.

  Further, at the timing of t3, the opening / closing operation (support) of the first electric auditors product 41a is started based on the end of the winning fluctuation display. Specifically, the first electric accessory 41a is opened.

  Further, based on the start of the opening / closing operation of the first electric accessory 41a (the winning variable display ends in the first unit area 71), the variable display currently performed, specifically, the second unit area The variable display of the normal symbol 72 stops. In this case, the variable display of the stopped ordinary symbol and the support lottery result related to the variable display are reset. Thus, during the opening / closing operation of the first electric accessory 41a, the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol in the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 ends, and the second electric accessory 42a and the third electric accessory 43a are displayed. The opening and closing operation is not performed.

  Note that in order to distinguish between the end of the normal variable display and the stop (end) of the variable display related to the reset, the stop of the variable display related to the reset is indicated by an arrow in FIGS.

  Thereafter, at the timings t4 and t5 during the opening and closing operation of the first electric auditors product 41a, a prize is awarded to the first through gate 51 and the third through gate 53. In this case, since the opening and closing operation of the first electric accessory 41a is being performed (supporting), the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol in the third unit area 73 is not started.

  Then, at the timing of t6, the opening and closing operation of the first electric accessory 41a ends. Specifically, the first electric accessory 41a is closed. Then, in the first unit area 71, the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol is performed again. The variable display is based on the occurrence of a winning in the first through gate 51 at the timing of t4. The variable display is a winning variable display. In this case, the variable display time is 0.5 seconds.

  Further, based on the end of the opening and closing operation of the first electric accessory 41a, the stop of the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol in the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 is released. Accordingly, the variable display of the third unit area 73 based on the winning in the third through gate 53 at the timing of t5 is started. In this case, any one of 0.7 sec, 1.0 sec, 1 and 3 sec is set as the variable display time of the third unit area 73 irrespective of the result of the hit / fail judgment.

  Thereafter, a prize is awarded to the first through gate 51 at the timing of t7. Then, the winning variation display of the first unit area 71 ends at the timing of t8. Based on the end of the selected variation display, the opening and closing operation of the first electric accessory 41a is started, and the variation display currently performed, specifically, the variation display of the ordinary symbol in the third unit area 73 is stopped. I do. In this case, the variable display of the stopped ordinary symbol and the support lottery result related to the variable display are reset.

  That is, when the winning variation display is performed in the first unit area 71, the winning variation display ends at a timing earlier than the end timing of the variation display of the normal symbol in the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73. . Then, based on the completion of the winning variation display of the first unit area 71 and the opening / closing operation of the first electric accessory 41a, the variation display of the ordinary symbol in the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 is performed. Stop. In this case, the variable display of the stopped ordinary symbol and the support lottery result related to the variable display are reset. Thus, the opening and closing operation of the second electric accessory 42a and the third electric accessory 43a is not performed, and only the opening and closing operation of the first electric accessory 41a is performed. As described above, the prize is not allowed for the first motor-driven accessory 41a, so that there are few benefits based on the opening / closing operation of the first motor-driven accessory 41a.

  By the way, as described above, the number of reservations that can be stored in each of the electrical activity holding areas 231 to 233 is four. Therefore, when a large number of game balls pass through the first through gate 51 within a time shorter than the digestion time of the hold information, the second electric charge holding area 231 stores the second number of game balls. An event may occur in which the sum of the numbers of reservations stored in both the combination holding area 232 and the third electrical combination holding area 233 increases (N1 <N2 + N3). In this case, the variable display is performed in each of the unit areas 71 to 73. In the above situation, when the variable display of the first unit area 71 is the winning variable display, the winning variable display is more likely to end before the variable display of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73. When the winning variation display of the first unit area 71 ends, the variation display of both the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 is reset. That is, the variable display of 2 and the result of the support lottery are reset by the variable display of 1 winning. As a result, even when the above event occurs, the event that the support of the second electric auditors goods 42a or the third electric auditors goods 43a is started does not occur.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t9 to t13 during the opening and closing operation of the first electric accessory 41a, a prize is given to any of the through gates 51 to 53.

  Then, at the timing of t14, the opening and closing operation of the first electric accessory 41a ends, and the variable display is started in each of the unit areas 71 to 73. In this case, it is assumed that the deviation display is performed in the first unit area 71, and the winning display is performed in the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73. In this case, the variable display time of the first unit area 71 is set longer than the variable display time of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73, and therefore, the variable display time of the first unit area 71 is earlier than the variable display time. Then, the variable display of the second unit area 72 or the third unit area 73 ends.

  Here, assuming that the variable display time of the second unit area 72 is selected to be shorter than the variable display time of the third unit area 73, the variable display of the second unit area 72 ends at the timing of t15. Then, the opening and closing operation of the second electric accessory 42a is started. Specifically, the first opening of the second electric accessory 42a is performed. On the basis of the start of the opening and closing operation of the second electric accessory 42a, the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol in the first unit area 71 and the third unit area 73 is temporarily stopped. Thereby, the variation display of the ordinary symbol in the first unit area 71 or the third unit area 73 ends while the second electric accessory 42a is open, and the opening and closing operation of the first electric accessory 41a and the third electric accessory 43a. Is not started. In FIGS. 23 (d) to 23 (f), the state of the suspension is indicated by a double line.

  At the subsequent timing of t16, the first opening of the second electric accessory 42a ends. Then, at the timing of t17 when one second has elapsed from the timing of t16, the second opening of the second electric accessory 42a is performed.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t18, the condition for ending the opening / closing operation of the second electric accessory 42a is satisfied, and the opening / closing operation of the second electric accessory 42a ends. In this case, when the hold information (the second electric hand counter C2) is stored in the second electric hand hold area 232, the variation display of the ordinary symbol based on the hold information is newly started in the second unit area 72. Is done.

  Further, based on the completion of the opening and closing operation of the second electric accessory 42a, the variable display temporarily stopped in the first unit area 71 and the third unit area 73 is resumed. That is, the time during which the opening / closing operation of the second electric accessory 42a is performed (the time from the timing of t15 to the timing of t18) is the suspension time.

  At the subsequent timing of t19, the remaining variable display time of the third unit area 73 elapses, and the variable display of the ordinary symbol in the third unit area 73 ends. Based on the end, the opening / closing operation of the third electric accessory 43a is started. Specifically, the first opening is performed in the third electric accessory 43a. On the basis of the start of the opening / closing operation of the third electric accessory 43a, the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol in the first unit area 71 and the second unit area 72 is temporarily stopped. Thereby, the variation display of the ordinary symbol in the first unit area 71 or the second unit area 72 is finished while the third electric auditorswear 43a is being opened, and the opening and closing operation of the first electric auditorswear 41a and the second electric auditorswear 42a is completed. Is not started.

  Here, the time obtained by adding the time from the timing of t14 to the timing of t15 and the time from the timing of t18 to the timing of t19 is the variable display time of the third unit area 73. In other words, the timing of the opening / closing operation of the third electric accessory 43a at the timing t19 starts from the timing of the timing t14 at which the variable display of the third unit area 73 is started, and the variation display time of the third unit area 73. It can be said that this is the timing when the time including the time during which the opening and closing operation of the second electric auditors product 42a is being performed has elapsed.

  Then, the first opening is completed at the timing of t20, and the second opening is performed at the timing of t21. The second opening is continued until the termination condition is satisfied.

  When the end condition of the opening and closing operation of the third electric auditors goods 43a is satisfied at the timing of t22, the opening and closing operation of the third electric auditors goods 43a ends. In this case, when the hold information (third electric win counter C3) is stored in the third electric hand hold area 233, the variable display of the ordinary symbol based on the hold information is newly started in the third unit area 73. Is done.

  Further, based on the completion of the opening / closing operation of the third electric accessory 43a, the variable display of the ordinary symbol temporarily stopped in the first unit area 71 and the second unit area 72 is restarted. Then, at the timing of t23, the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol in the second unit area 72 ends, the opening / closing operation of the second electric accessory 42a is started again, and the first unit area 71 and the third unit area 73 are opened. Normally, the fluctuation display of symbols is temporarily stopped.

  The sum of the time from t18 to t19 and the time from t22 to t23 is the variable display time of the second unit area 72. In other words, the timing at t23 at which the opening and closing operation of the second electric accessory 42a is started is the time at which the variable display of the second unit area 72 starts at t18 and the variable display time of the second unit area 72. It can be said that this is the timing when the time including the time during which the opening and closing operation of the third electric accessory 43a is being performed has elapsed.

  In other words, during the variation display of the first unit area 71, the variation display of the ordinary symbol in the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 ends, and the opening and closing of the second electric accessory 42a and the third electric accessory 43a. The operation is performed. In this case, while the opening / closing operation of one of the second and third electric auditors 43a is being performed, the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol in each unit area corresponding to the other electric auditors. Pauses. Then, based on the completion of the opening / closing operation of the one electric auditorium, the variable display of the normal symbol in each unit area corresponding to the other electric auditorium is restarted, and further, the unit area corresponding to the one electric auditorium Is started to be displayed. As a result, the frequency of awarding of gaming balls to the second and third electric winning combinations 42 and 43 increases in a situation where the normal symbol deviation display is performed in the first unit area 71. Therefore, the privilege given to the player increases as compared with the case where the winning variation display is performed in the first unit area 71.

  In this case, the support interval of the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a depends on the variable display time of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73. These fluctuation display times fluctuate according to the fluctuation type counter CS. This makes it difficult to grasp the support interval based on the support end timing. Therefore, it is possible to play the game while predicting the start timing of the support, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game during the variation display of the first unit area 71.

  In particular, at the start timing of the variation display of the first unit region 71, the variation display of the second unit region 72 and the third unit region 73 can be simultaneously started. In this case, the fluctuation display time of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 is determined using the same fluctuation type counter CS. In such a case, since the variable display time corresponding to the variable type counter CS is different between the second table TD2 and the third table TD3, the different variable display time is different between the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73. Is selected. Thus, immediately after one variable display and the opening / closing operation based thereon are completed, the other variable display is immediately terminated, and the opening / closing operation based thereon is not performed.

  Further, as already described, the opening and closing operation of the second electric accessory 42a and the third electric accessory 43a is configured such that after the short-time opening is performed, the opening is performed for a long time after an interval of 1 sec. Therefore, the player confirms that the opening has been performed for a short time, and grasps the electric accessory that is currently opened and closed. Then, during an interval of 1 sec, the game ball is fired toward the electric winning winning opening provided with the electric accessory for which the opening / closing operation is performed this time. As a result, it is possible to increase the frequency of occurrence of a prize at the electric winning prize port corresponding to the electric auditors product to be opened and closed. In other words, it can be said that the short-time opening of the second electric accessory 42a and the third electric accessory 43a is for notifying the player of the electric accessory on which the opening / closing operation is performed this time. It can be said that the interval between the opening and the long-time opening is a time for the player to make a distinction based on the notification.

  In particular, it is assumed that in a situation where the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a can be supported, the player is paying attention to the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a. . In such a situation, the notification of the hitting is performed by the attention-targeted second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a, so that the player can surely confirm the notification of the hitting. ing.

  In addition, since the interval time is set to be longer than the firing cycle of the game balls, at least one game ball can be fired during the interval. Thus, the launch direction of the game ball can be adjusted based on the flow-down state of the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to preferably perform the above-described punching.

  Further, the support ending condition includes that the total opening time of the short-time opening and the long-time opening is the upper limit opening time. In such a configuration, the first opening as a notification of the division is a short-time opening, and therefore, a long opening time of the long-time opening for granting a privilege to the player can be secured. As a result, it is possible to appropriately perform the notification of the separation while securing the profit of the player.

  Note that the opening and closing operation of the second electric auditors product 42a and the third electric auditors product 43a is not limited to this, and may be configured to be opened three or more times, for example. In this case, if the number of times that the opening is performed in a short time is increased, it becomes more conspicuous, so that the opening / closing operation target can be easily grasped. On the other hand, since it is necessary to shorten the opening time of the long-time opening so as not to exceed the upper limit opening time, the privilege obtained by the player is likely to be reduced.

  In addition, although the configuration is such that the short-time opening and the long-time opening with different opening times are performed, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration in which the opening is performed a plurality of times during one opening time may be adopted. In this case, the opening time may be set to be longer than 0.6 seconds of the firing cycle of the game balls so that the game balls can enter to some extent during the opening.

  The interval time is arbitrary as long as the time for performing the division is secured. However, if the interval time is set to be long, an act of not firing the game ball during the interval, that is, a so-called stop hit may be performed, so that the time for performing the hitting is set to a short value within a range in which the time can be secured. Good to be.

  Furthermore, a plurality of opening / closing modes having different interval times may be prepared in advance, and when the opening / closing operation is started, one opening / closing mode may be selected from the plurality of opening / closing modes. This configuration can also suppress the hitting.

  The fluctuation display of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 and the opening / closing operation of the second electric accessory 42a and the third electric accessory 43a are repeatedly performed, and the deviation display of the first unit area 71 at the timing of t24. When the time elapses, a departure result is displayed in the first unit area 71. In this case, the variable display of the ordinary symbols performed in the second unit area 72 is continuously performed.

  Incidentally, as described above, the count of the deviation change display time of the first unit area 71 is counted only when the opening / closing operation of the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a is not performed. That is, the time from the start timing of the off-variation display of the first unit area 71 (timing at t14) to the end timing of the off-variation display of the first unit area 71 (timing at t24) is the off-variation display determined by the lottery. This is the total time of the time and the time when the opening and closing operation of the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a is performed.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t25, a winning in the third through gate 53 occurs. In this case, since a deviation result is being displayed in the first unit area 71, no new variable display is started in the third unit area 73.

  Then, the fluctuation display of the second unit area 72 ends at the timing of t26, and the opening / closing operation of the second electric accessory 42a starts.

  Thereafter, the opening and closing operation of the second electric accessory 42a ends at the timing of t27. As a result, all of the variable display of the second unit area 72, the variable display of the third unit area 73, the opening / closing operation of the second electric accessory 42a, and the opening / closing operation of the third electric accessory 43a end, and the standby state is established. Time counting starts.

  Then, at the timing of t28 when the standby time has elapsed, the display of the deviation result ends, and a new variable display is started in each of the unit areas 71 to 73.

  That is, when the out-of-shift display of the first unit area 71 ends, the change display in the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 continues without being stopped. For this reason, during the display of the deviation result of the first unit area 71, the variable display of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 may end. In this case, if the variable display is the winning variable display, the opening / closing operation of the corresponding electric accessory is performed.

  On the other hand, during the display of the departure result of the first unit area 71, the start of the variable display is newly restricted in the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73. That is, during the display of the departure result of the first unit area 71, at the end timing of the departure fluctuation display, the display of the fluctuating display in the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 is performed as usual. The process is performed, and thereafter, a new variable display is not started. That is, from the start of the display of the variation of the first unit area 71 to the start of the counting of the standby time (from the timing of t14 to the timing of t27), the advantageous state (the privilege for the player) that is advantageous to the player Is easily applied), and all of the variable display of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 and the support of the second electric accessory 42a and the third electric accessory 43a may end. This is the termination condition of the advantageous state.

  In the present embodiment, the display time of the departure result is determined based on the display start timing of the departure result from each of the second unit area 72, the third unit area 73, the second electric accessory 42a, and the third electric accessory 43a. The time is the sum of the time up to the end of the operation and the standby time, but is not limited thereto, and may be set as, for example, a predetermined fixed time. In this case, the fixed time is a time obtained by combining the longest time required for the variable display of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 and the support of the second electric auditors hand 42a and the third electric auditors hand 43a with the standby time. It is better to set longer. Accordingly, there is no inconvenience that the display of the out-of-off result ends in the situation where each of the above operations is being performed, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

<Construction for performing various effects>
Next, a configuration for performing various effects using the speaker unit 24 and the symbol display device 81 will be described.

  First, an electrical configuration for performing various effects will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

  The MPU 242 is mounted on the sound emission control board 241 provided in the sound emission control device 102. The MPU 242 is a ROM 243 storing various control programs executed by the MPU 242 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data at the time of executing the control programs stored in the ROM 243. This is an element having a built-in RAM 244, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 243 and the RAM 244 be integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 242, and that each of them may be individually integrated into a chip.

  The MPU 242 is provided with an input port and an output port. The main controller 101 is connected to the input side of the MPU 242. The main controller 101 receives the various commands described above.

  The output side of the MPU 242 is connected to each of the holding lamp units 91 to 93 provided in the variable display unit 61, the display lamp unit 23 and the speaker unit 24 provided in the front door frame 14, and the display control unit 212. Is connected. The MPU 242 of the sound emission control device 102 determines an effect pattern based on the command received from the main control device 101, transmits an effect command corresponding to the effect pattern to the display control device 212, and receives the effect command from the main control device 101. The command is transmitted to the display control device 212 as it is.

  The display control device 212 includes an MPU 252, a video display processor (VDP) 255, a character ROM 256, and a video RAM 257, which are elements in which a program ROM 253 and a work RAM 254 are combined into a chip. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 253 and the work RAM 254 be integrated into one chip for the MPU 252, and each may be configured as an individual chip.

  The MPU 252 of the display control device 212 executes processing corresponding to the effect command based on receiving various effect commands from the sound emission control device 102, and renders the VDP 255 in the video RAM 257 in accordance with the processing result. By executing the processing, various images are displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 81.

  The VDP 255 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the symbol display device 81. The VDP 255 is called an “rendering chip” because it is formed as an IC chip, and its substance can be called a microcomputer chip having firmware dedicated for rendering processing. The VDP 255 adjusts respective timings of the MPU 252, the video RAM 257, and the like, intervenes in reading and writing of data, and reads out image data to be stored in the video RAM 257 from the character ROM 256 at a predetermined timing and displays the image data on the symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 256 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as decorative symbols displayed on the symbol display device 81. The character ROM 256 holds bitmap format image data of various display decoration patterns, a color pallet table which is referred to when determining the expression color of each bit of the bitmap image, and the like.

  Note that a plurality of character ROMs 256 may be provided, and image data and the like may be stored in each of the character ROMs 256. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which JPEG format image data for a background image stored in the program ROM 253 is stored in the character ROM 256.

  The video RAM 257 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 81. The display content of the symbol display device 81 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 257.

<Effect control processing executed by sound emission control device 102>
Next, the effect control processing executed by the MPU 242 of the sound emission control device 102 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The effect control process is started periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) by the MPU 242. Based on a command received from the main control device 101, one effect among various effects is determined, and Based on the determined effect mode, a process or the like for causing the decorative pattern to be displayed on the display screen G is executed.

  In the following description, the variation display of the ordinary symbols in the first unit area 71 will be described as the game times. The game times are, as described above, the period in which the variable display of the ordinary symbol is started in the first unit area 71, the stop result corresponding to the support lottery result is displayed, and the variable display of the ordinary symbol is stopped. is there. In this case, the game time when the support lottery result is the winning result (winning variation display of the ordinary symbol in the first unit area 71) is the winning game time, and the game time when the support lottery result is the off result (the first unit). A normal symbol deviation display in the area 71) is referred to as a deviation game time. The game time of the winning game time is the winning fluctuation display time of the first unit area 71, and the game time of the off-game time is the deviation fluctuation display time of the first unit area 71.

  As the various effects, a plurality of types of effects corresponding to the game times are prepared. More specifically, when the next game time is continuous with respect to the support of the first electric accessory 41a based on the predetermined winning game time, the hold announcement effect and the time reduction hold advance announcement effect are performed, and the predetermined winning game time In the case where the next winning game time is discontinuous with respect to the support of the first electric auditors 41a based on it (excluding the off-game time and the winning game time), the normal time-saving effect performed and the advantage performed on the off-game time The production during the state is set.

  The hold announcement effect and the time reduction advance notice effect are the contents of the hold information (the first electric hand counter C1) stored in the first electric hand holding area 231, specifically, the result of the support lottery using the hold information. It is a production that suggests. The hold announcement effect and the time reduction advance notice effect are performed at a timing before the game round related to the hold information is started, specifically, for the first electric auditors 41a related to the hold information immediately before the hold information. It is started at the start timing of support or during support.

  More specifically, the hold announcement effect is executed when the hold information on the next game round has been acquired at the start timing of the support of the first electric auditors goods 41a. On the other hand, the time-saving on-hold announcement effect is executed when the on-hold information relating to the next game time is acquired during the support of the first electric auditors goods 41a.

  In addition, the pending announcement effect includes a normal reservation announcement effect selected when the next game time is a winning game time, and an advantageous advance announcement effect selected when the next game time is a missed game time, Is set. Similarly, with regard to the time reduction advance notice production, the time reduction normal reservation advance production selected when the next game time is the winning game time and the time reduction advantage selected when the next game time is the off game time And a pending announcement effect have been set.

  Each normal reservation announcement effect is executed over a support based on a predetermined winning game time and a next game time which is a game time based on the hold information targeted for the production of the normal reservation announcement effect. On the other hand, each advantage hold announcement effect is performed only during support based on the predetermined winning game times. This is to prevent each of the advantageous holding announcement effects and the effect in the advantageous state from being performed simultaneously.

  In the effect control processing, any one of the various effects described above is executed in accordance with the command received from the main control device 101 and the status of the hold information stored in the first electric charge holding area 231.

  Describing a specific processing configuration, first, in step S1301, it is determined whether a hold command, specifically, a winning hold command or a disconnection hold command has been received. As described above, the hold command is a command that is set when the first electric win counter C1 is acquired. In particular, the winning hold command is a command that is set when the support lottery result obtained by using the obtained first electric winning counter C1 is a winning result. This command is set when the support lottery result using the counter C1 is a departure result.

  If a pending command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S1303. If a pending command has been received, a pending command corresponding process is executed in step S1302, and the process proceeds to step S1303. In steps S1303 to S1315, processing corresponding to various commands other than the hold command is executed.

  Here, as described above, the hold command is transmitted from the main control device 101 to the sound emission control device 102 when a winning in the first through gate 51 occurs and the first electric power counter C1 is acquired. Is what is done. For this reason, depending on the timing of the winning of the first through gate 51, the hold command and another command may be set in the same normal processing cycle. Therefore, by executing the processing related to the pending command first, and then performing the processing corresponding to the other command after the execution of the processing, no time lag occurs between the processing corresponding to the pending command and the processing corresponding to the other command. It has become.

  The hold command handling process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1401, a process of storing the hold command information included in the received hold command in the RAM 244 of the sound emission control device 102 is executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 24, the RAM 244 is provided with a reserved command information storage area 261 for storing the reserved command information. The hold command information storage area 261 includes four unit storage areas 261a to 261d corresponding to the hold areas RE1 to RE4 of the first electric charge holding area 231. It is stored in one of the unit storage areas 261a to 261d. Specifically, when the hold command is received, the hold command information is sequentially stored in the order of the first unit storage area 261a → the second unit storage area 261b → the third unit storage area 261c → the fourth unit storage area 261d. Go. Thereby, each of the reserved areas RE1 to RE4 of the first electric charge retaining area 231 in the RAM 204 of the main control device 101 and each of the unit storage areas 261a to 261d of the reserved command information storage area 261 in the RAM 244 of the audio emission control device 102 are stored. Correlated.

  Further, the pending command information includes the type of the pending command, specifically, information on whether the command is a winning pending command or a disconnection pending command.

  In the following step S1402, a process is executed to determine the number of the first electric-power counter C1 currently acquired in the first electric-power holding area 231. Specifically, a process of incrementing the hold number storage area K provided in the hold command information storage area 261 of the RAM 244 by one is executed. The reserved number storage area K is for the voice light emission control device 102 to grasp the number of pending information targeted for various effects, specifically, the number of the first electric win counter C1 currently acquired. .

  After the execution of the processing of step S1402, the process proceeds to step S1403, and it is determined whether or not the game is being played (the first unit area 71 is being displayed in a variable manner). It is determined whether or not the game-in-progress flag is set in the game-in-progress flag storage area 262 provided in the RAM 244. The game in-flight flag is a flag that is set when a normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner in the first unit area 71. More specifically, the flag is set when a fluctuation command is received, and is a release command or a deviation change end command. Is a flag that is deleted when a is received.

  If the game is being played, the hold command corresponding process is terminated as it is. If the game is not being played, it is determined in step S1404 whether or not the first electric auditors 41a is being opened (supported). judge. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the open flag is set in the open flag storage area 263 provided in the RAM 244. The opening flag is a flag that is set when the first electric accessory 41a is being opened. More specifically, it is a flag that is set when an opening command is received and that is cleared when a closing command is received. is there.

  When the first motor-driven accessory 41a is not being opened, the suspension command response processing is terminated as it is, while when the first electric auditors-powered product 41a is being opened, the time-saving reservation notice is given in steps S1405 to S1415. Executes the process related to the effect.

  First, in step S1405, it is determined whether or not a hold notice flag is set in the hold notice flag storage area 264 provided in the RAM 244. The hold notice flag is a flag that is set when a hold notice effect is performed, and is a flag that is deleted when a game round related to hold information that is not a target of the hold notice effect is started.

  When the hold notice flag is set, it means that the hold notice effect has already been performed. In this case, the suspension command handling process ends. On the other hand, if the hold notice flag is not set, a process for starting a time-saving hold notice effect is executed in steps S1406 to S1414.

  More specifically, first, a suspension notice flag is set in step S1406. Then, in step S1407, the remaining opening time of the first electric auditors product 41a is grasped. Specifically, a timer counter area 265 is provided in the RAM 244, and the timer counter area 265 stores a timer counter T for grasping the opening time of the first electric accessory 41a. The timer counter T is set to "3000" when the first electric accessory 41a is opened, and is decremented by one each time the effect control process is started. Since the effect control process is started at a cycle of 2 msec, the timer counter T becomes “0” when 6 sec, which is the opening time of the first electric accessory 41a, has elapsed. In step S1407, by grasping the value of the timer counter T at the present time, the remaining opening time from the present time to the closing of the first electric accessory 41a is grasped.

  After that, in step S1408, a process of subtracting 1 from the reserved number storage area K is executed. Then, in step S1409, the information stored in the first unit storage area 261a is stored in the execution area 261e provided in the RAM 244, and the information stored in each of the unit storage areas 261b to 261d is shifted. Let it. The shift of the data is the same as the data shift of the execution area AE of the first electric charge holding area 231 and the data of the respective holding areas RE1 to RE4.

  In the following step S1410, it is determined whether or not the information on the support lottery result is appropriate among the information stored in the execution area 261e. Then, in step S1411, it is determined whether or not the current support lottery result is a win based on the obtained win / fail information.

  If the support lottery result is a winning, it means that the next game time is a winning game time. In this case, the process proceeds to step S1412, and processing for selecting an effect time corresponding to the remaining opening time grasped in step S1407 is executed. Specifically, a plurality of presentation times (for example, 0.5 sec, 1.0 sec, 1.5 sec, ..., 5.5 sec, 6.0 sec) are set in advance within the numerical range of 0 to 6.5 sec as the presentation time. And selects one production time corresponding to the remaining opening time from the plurality of production times. In detail, a maximum time within a range smaller than the sum of the remaining open time and the winning game time of 0.5 sec is selected from the plurality of effect times. For example, when the remaining opening time is 1.7 sec, 2.0 sec is selected as the presentation time.

  After that, in step S1413, a time-saving normal hold advance notice effect corresponding to the effect time selected in step S1412 is started, and the hold command handling process ends.

  Specifically, the ROM 243 of the sound emission control device 102 is provided with various data table storage areas 271, and the various data table storage areas 271 are provided with a plurality of data tables corresponding to a plurality of effects. Is set. In the data table, a sound output pattern and a light control pattern for performing the effect are set. In step S1413, the data table corresponding to the time-saving normal hold announcement effect is read out of the plurality of types of data tables.

  Here, a plurality of types of data tables corresponding to the time reduction normal hold announcement effect are prepared in advance so as to correspond to a plurality of effect times. In step S1413, the data table corresponding to the production time selected in step S1408 is read out of the data tables corresponding to the plurality of types of time-saving regular on-hold announcement production, and the read data table is set in the production execution area. I do. As a result, a sound and light effect corresponding to the time reduction normal hold notice effect is started.

  Further, in step S1413, an effect command corresponding to the time reduction normal hold notice effect is transmitted to the display control device 212. The effect command includes identification information for identifying the effect time selected in step S1412. When receiving the above-mentioned effect command, the display control device 212 grasps the current effect time from the specific information included in the effect command. Then, the display control of the symbol display device 81 is performed so that the variation display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the effect command and the effect time is performed on the display screen G.

  Specifically, the program ROM 253 of the display control device 212 stores a data table for causing the display of the decorative symbols to be changed on the display screen G. A plurality of data tables are prepared in advance corresponding to a plurality of types of effects, and the display patterns of the decorative symbols are different from each other. When the display control device 212 receives the effect command corresponding to the time reduction normal hold notice effect, the display control device 212 corresponds to the time reduction normal hold notice effect of the plurality of types of data tables, and corresponds to the current effect time. The data table is read out, and a time reduction normal hold announcement effect is started on the display screen G according to the read out data table.

  A specific mode of the display screen G in the time-saving normal reservation notice effect will be described in detail. When the time reduction normal reservation notice effect is started, the decorative display of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is started to change. Thereafter, at a timing before the elapse time of the above-mentioned production time, the variation display of the decorative symbols is stopped in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and as a result of the stop, each activated line L1 to L5 It is provisionally displayed in a state where the combination of the decorative symbols is slightly swinging upward. Thereafter, at the timing when the above-mentioned effect time has elapsed, the combination of the decoupling decorative symbols is stopped (confirmed) and displayed, and the time-saving normal reservation notice effect ends. Thereby, the player can understand that the next game time is the winning game time, that is, that the game state does not shift to the advantageous state. The stop display of the combination of the off decorative symbols is maintained until a new effect is started.

  In this case, the variation display time of the decorative symbol is changed in accordance with the change of the effect time. Specifically, in each data table corresponding to the time reduction normal hold notice effect, so that the time from the temporary display of the decorative pattern is stopped regardless of each effect time until the stop display is constant, The time until the decorative symbol is temporarily displayed is set so as to deviate from the timing of starting the change of the decorative symbol corresponding to each effect time. As a result, the time from the temporary display of the off decorative pattern to the stop display is constant regardless of the effect time.

  In addition, the variation display mode of the decoration symbol is arbitrary as long as the variation display of the decoration symbol is started in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 and the combination of the decoration symbols is stopped and displayed at the elapse of the production time. For example, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a combination of decorative patterns is stopped and displayed at the timing when the effect time elapses without being temporarily displayed.

  Also, for example, first, a high-speed fluctuation display (low-identification fluctuation display) of a decorative symbol is started, and thereafter, a low-speed fluctuation display (high-identification fluctuation display) having a fluctuation display speed lower than the high-speed fluctuation display is performed. The display or the stop display may be adopted. In this case, it is preferable that the time during which the high-speed fluctuation display is performed is shortened in correspondence with the remaining opening time. As a result, it is possible to appropriately vary the production time while reducing the sense of discomfort given to the player.

  The same applies to the variable display of decorative symbols in other effects described below.

  On the other hand, if the support lottery result is a missed result, it means that the next game time is a missed game time. In this case, in step S1414, a process of selecting an effect time corresponding to the remaining opening time grasped in step S1407 is executed. Specifically, a maximum time within a range smaller than the remaining opening time is selected from a plurality of effect times. For example, when the remaining opening time is 1.7 sec, 1.5 sec is selected as the presentation time.

  Thereafter, in step S1415, a time-saving advantage advance notice effect corresponding to the effect time selected in step S1414 is selected, and the suspension command handling process ends. Specifically, a data table corresponding to the time saving advantage advance notice effect is stored in the various data table storage area 271 of the ROM 243 of the sound emission control device 102 and the program ROM 253 of the display control device 212, respectively. A plurality of data tables are prepared in advance corresponding to a plurality of presentation times. In step S1415, the sound emission control device 102 reads a data table corresponding to the currently selected effect time, and sets the read data table in the effect execution area.

  Further, in step S1415, an effect command corresponding to the time saving advantage advance notice effect is transmitted to the display control device 212. The effect command includes identification information for identifying the effect time selected in step S1414. When receiving the above-mentioned effect command, the display control device 212 grasps the current effect time from the specific information included in the effect command. Then, a data table corresponding to the current production time is read out of a plurality of types of data tables corresponding to the time reduction advantage reservation announcement effect, and the time reduction advantage reservation announcement effect is started on the display screen G according to the read data table. .

  A specific mode of the display screen G in the time-saving advantage reservation announcement effect will be described in detail. When the time-saving advantage reservation announcement effect is started, the decorative display of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is started to change. Thereafter, at the timing before the elapse timing of the effect time, the variation display of the decorative symbol is stopped in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and at least one of the activated lines L1 to L5 The combination of the jackpot decoration patterns is temporarily displayed on one activated line. Thereafter, at the timing when the above-mentioned effect time has elapsed, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols is stopped (confirmed) and displayed, and the time-saving advantageous reservation notice effect is ended. Thereby, the player can understand that the next game time is a miss game time, that is, the game state shifts to the advantageous state.

  According to this processing, when the hold command information is acquired in a situation where the first electric accessory 41a is being opened and the hold announcement effect has not been executed, the time reduction normal based on the acquired hold command information is performed. A hold announcement effect or a time-saving advantage advance announcement effect is executed.

  In this case, with regard to the time reduction normal hold notice effect, the time obtained by adding the remaining opening time of the first electric auditors goods 41a and the time related to the game time after opening of the first electric auditors goods 41a (winning game time). , Is secured as a production time for the normal reservation advance notice production. As a result, it is possible to secure a time longer than the winning game time as an effect time of the time reduction normal reservation notice effect, and it is possible to diversify the time reduction normal reservation notice effect.

  On the other hand, with regard to the time-saving advantage advance notice effect, the remaining opening time of the first electric auditors product 41a is secured as the effect time of the time-saving advantage advance notice effect. Thereby, even if the effect during the advantageous state is performed in the next game time (out-of-game time), the time-saving advantageous reservation notice effect can be performed.

  The present invention is not limited to the above-described configuration, and it is sufficient that at least a part of the remaining opening time of the first electric auditors product 41a can be secured as an effect time of a time-saving normal reservation advance notice effect or a time-saving advantageous hold advance notice effect. However, in view of securing the variety of these reservation notice effects, it is better to use the remaining opening time as much as possible.

  Returning to the description of the effect control processing (FIG. 25), in step S1303, it is determined whether or not a release command has been received. The release command is a command that is set when the first electric accessory 41a is released, as described above. If a release command has been received, a release command corresponding process is executed in step S1304, and the flow advances to step S1315.

  The release command processing will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  First, in step S1501, "3000" is set in the timer counter T.

  In the following step S1502, it is determined whether or not the pending command information stored in the pending command information storage area 261 exists. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the reserved number storage area K is “1” or more. If the value of the number-of-holds storage area K is equal to or greater than “1”, the process of determining a hold announcement effect corresponding to the hold command information stored in the hold command information storage area 261 in steps S1503 to S1509 is performed. Execute. In this case, the processing in steps S1503 to S1507 is the same as the processing in steps S1406 and S1408 to S1411 in the pending command corresponding processing (FIG. 26), and thus the description is omitted.

  If the support lottery result of the hold information targeted for this hold announcement effect is a winning result, that is, if the next game time is a win game time, an affirmative determination is made in step S1507, and in step S1508 a normal hold advance effect is made. Is started, and the release command processing is terminated. Specifically, in the various data table storage area 271 of the ROM 243 of the audio light emission control device 102 and the program ROM 253 of the display control device 212, data tables corresponding to the normal suspension notice effect are stored, respectively. In step S1508, a data table corresponding to the normal hold announcement effect is read from the various data table storage area 271, and the read data table is set in the effect execution area.

  In step S1508, an effect command corresponding to the normal hold announcement effect is transmitted to the display control device 212. When the display control device 212 receives the above-mentioned effect command, it reads out a data table corresponding to the normal hold advance notice effect from the program ROM 253, and starts the normal hold advance effect on the display screen G according to the read data table.

  In each data table corresponding to the normal hold announcement effect, a time (6.5 seconds) obtained by adding the opening time (6 seconds) of the first motor-driven accessory 41a and the winning game time (0.5 seconds) is set as the effect time. Have been. That is, the normal hold announcement effect is performed over the opening of the first electric auditors product 41a based on the predetermined winning game time and the next game time (winning game time).

  It should be noted that a specific mode of the display screen G in the normal hold advance notice effect is the same as that of the time-saving normal hold advance effect except that the variable display time of the decorative symbol is different, and therefore the description is omitted.

  On the other hand, if the support lottery result of the hold information to be subjected to the current hold announcement effect is an out-of-order result, that is, if the next game time is out of play, a negative determination is made in step S1507 and an advantageous hold is made in step S1509. A notice effect is started, and the processing corresponding to the opening command is ended. Specifically, the various data table storage area 271 of the ROM 243 of the audio light emission control device 102 and the program ROM 253 of the display control device 212 store data tables corresponding to the advantageous hold announcement effect, respectively. In step S1509, a data table corresponding to the advantageous hold announcement effect is read from the various data table storage area 271, and the read data table is set in the effect execution area.

  Also, in step S1509, an effect command corresponding to the advantageous hold announcement effect is transmitted to the display control device 212. When receiving the above-mentioned effect command, the display control device 212 reads a data table corresponding to the advantageous hold announcement effect from the program ROM 253, and starts the advantageous hold announcement effect on the display screen G according to the read data table.

  The opening time (6 sec) of the first motor-operated accessory 41a is set as an effect time in each data table corresponding to the advantageous hold announcement effect. In other words, the advantageous holding announcement effect is performed only during opening of the first motor-driven accessory 41a based on the predetermined winning game times.

  It should be noted that a specific mode of the display screen G in the advantageous hold announcement effect is the same as that of the time-saving advantage advance announcement effect except that the variable display time of the decorative symbol is different, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  According to such a configuration, when the opening of the first electric accessory 41a based on the predetermined winning game time is started in a situation where the hold command information on the next game time is stored in the hold command information storage area 261, A hold notice effect (normal hold notice effect or advantageous hold notice effect) corresponding to the hold command information (support lottery result) is executed. In this case, the opening time of the first electric accessory 41a based on the winning game time is secured as the production time of the hold notice effect. As a result, it is possible to suitably perform the hold announcement effect.

  In other words, for the normal hold announcement effect, the opening time of the first electric auditors 41a based on the winning game time and the time of the next game time (winning game time) are secured as the effect time of the normal hold advance effect. Thereby, the diversification of the normal hold announcement effect can be achieved by the opening time of the first electric auditors product 41a.

  On the other hand, with regard to the advantageous hold announcement effect, the opening time of the first electric auditors product 41a is secured as the effect time of the advantageous hold announcement effect. Thereby, even if the effect during the advantageous state is performed in the next game time (out-of-game time), the advantage pending announcement effect can be performed.

  In particular, the production time of each reservation notice production is longer than the production time of each of the above-mentioned time reduction reservation productions. For this reason, it is possible to diversify the on-hold notice effect as compared with each of the on-time notice notice effects.

  The present invention is not limited to the above-described configuration, and it is sufficient that at least a part of the opening time of the first electric auditors product 41a can be secured as the production time of each of the above-mentioned pending announcement productions. For example, the effect time of the normal hold announcement effect may be shorter than the combined time of the opening time of the first electric auditors product 41a and the winning game time. Further, the effect time of the advantageous holding announcement effect may be shorter than the opening time of the first electric auditors product 41a. However, in view of securing the diversity of the above-mentioned holding notice effects, it is better to secure the entire opening time of the first electric auditors product 41a as the effect time.

  Incidentally, when the value of the number-of-holds storage area K is not equal to or more than "1" (step S1504: NO), the main release command corresponding processing is terminated as it is. In this case, a new effect is not performed until a time-saving hold announcement effect based on the acquisition of the hold information related to the next game time is performed, and the stop result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the previous game time is continuously displayed.

  Note that the present invention is not limited to the above-described configuration, and may be configured to perform a predetermined effect while the first electric auditors product 41a is being supported, for example. In this case, when the hold information related to the next game time is acquired during the predetermined effect, the effect may be switched so that the time reduction advance notice effect is started instead of the predetermined effect.

  The predetermined effect may be, for example, an effect that is continuous with a time-saving on-hold announcement effect. Thereby, it is possible to reduce a sense of discomfort given to the player when switching to the time reduction notice effect.

  Returning to the description of the effect control processing (FIG. 25), when the release command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S1305, and it is determined whether or not a change command (winning change command or out-of-change command) has been received. The change command is transmitted when the change display of the ordinary symbol is started in the first unit area 71 as described above. If the change command has been received, the process executes a change command corresponding process in step S1306, and proceeds to step S1315.

  The change command handling process will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  First, in step S1601, the type of the variable command is grasped. Specifically, it is determined whether the received fluctuation command is a winning fluctuation command or a deviation fluctuation command. Then, in a step S1602, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation command received this time is a winning command.

  If it is a winning change command, it is determined in step S1603 whether or not the hold notice flag is set.

  If the hold notice flag is not set, the hold notice effect or the time-saving hold notice effect is executed based on the hold information (the first electric winning counter C1) which triggered the current winning game time (winning change command setting). Means not. In this case, in steps S1604 to S1606, a process related to a time reduction normal effect is executed.

  Here, the hold announcement effect or the time reduction advance announcement effect is that the hold information relating to the next game time is acquired before the opening (support) of the first electric auditors goods 41a based on the predetermined winning game time is completed. It is done in. For this reason, a negative determination in step S1603 means that the current winning game time is discontinuous with the opening of the first motor-operated role 41a. It can be said that this is executed in the non-continuous winning game times.

  Specifically, regarding the processing related to the time reduction normal effect, first, the processing of step S1604 and step S1605 is executed. Since these processes are the same as those already described, the description will be omitted.

  Then, in step S1606, a time-saving normal effect is started, and the processing corresponding to the fluctuation command is ended. Specifically, a data table corresponding to a time-saving normal effect is stored in the various data table storage area 271 of the ROM 243 of the sound emission control device 102 and the program ROM 253 of the display control device 212, respectively. In step S1606, a data table corresponding to the time reduction normal effect is read from the ROM 243, and the read data table is set in the effect execution area.

  In step S1606, a process of transmitting an effect command corresponding to the time reduction normal effect to the display control device 212 is executed. The display control device 212 reads, from the program ROM 253, a data table for allowing the decorative display to be displayed on the display screen G corresponding to the time reduction normal effect on the basis of the effect command. , A normal time reduction effect is started on the display screen G.

  A specific mode of the display screen G in the normal time reduction effect will be described in detail. When the time reduction normal effect is started, the decorative symbols in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are temporarily hidden. After that, the combination of the decorative symbols is temporarily displayed on the activated lines L1 to L5 in a slightly swinging state. Thereafter, at the timing when the above-mentioned effect time has elapsed, the combination of the decorative symbols is stopped (confirmed) and displayed, and the normal time-saving effect is ended.

  Here, the same time (0.5 sec) as the winning game time is set as an effect time in each data table corresponding to the time reduction normal effect stored in the sound emission control device 102 and the display control device 212. . In other words, the time reduction normal effect is an effect performed over the winning game times.

  On the other hand, if the hold advance notice flag is set, it means that the normal hold advance notice effect or the time-saving normal hold advance notice effect is being performed. In this case, the process proceeds to step S1607, where the suspension notice flag is deleted, and the processing for coping with the fluctuation command is ended.

  That is, when the opening of the first electric auditors product 41a and the game times are continuous, during the opening of the first electric auditors product 41a, a reservation announcement effect or a time-saving reservation announcement effect for the hold information of the next game time is given. Be executed.

  In this case, if the hold information (and the corresponding hold command information) has already been acquired at the opening timing of the first motor-driven accessory 41a, the entire opening time of the first motor-operated accessory 41a becomes the hold announcement effect. The production time is secured. On the other hand, when the hold information is acquired during the opening of the first motor-driven accessory 41a, the remaining opening time of the first motor-driven accessory 41a is secured as an effect time of the shortened advance notice effect.

  On the other hand, in the case where the opening of the first electric auditors product 41a and the game time are discontinuous (excluding the off game time and the win game time) and the game time is the win game time, , A time-saving normal effect is performed over the winning game times.

  On the other hand, if the received variation command is not a winning variation command (step S1602: NO determination), it means that a deviation variation command has been received. In this case, in step S1608, the deviation fluctuation display time is grasped from the specific information included in the deviation fluctuation command.

  Thereafter, in step S1609, a process for displaying the remaining advantageous time is executed. Specifically, a specific command in which the out-of-range fluctuation display time grasped in the previous step S1608 is set as the remaining advantageous time is transmitted to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 displays the deviation display time on the display screen G based on the reception of the specific command, and starts the countdown of the deviation display time. Specifically, the work RAM 254 of the display control device 212 is provided with a count display timer counter for measuring time. Based on the reception of the specific command, the display control device 212 sets the count display timer counter to a value corresponding to the deviation display time, and updates the count display timer counter by subtracting 1 at a predetermined cycle. . This makes it possible to grasp the remaining advantageous time based on the count display timer counter. Then, the remaining advantageous time displayed on the display screen G is updated each time the count display timer counter is updated, or once for a plurality of updates.

  After the execution of the processing in step S1609, the effect in the advantageous state is started in step S1610, and the variable command handling processing ends. Specifically, in the various data table storage area 271 of the ROM 243 of the sound emission control device 102 and the program ROM 253 of the display control device 212, data tables corresponding to the effects during the advantageous state are stored. In step S1610, a data table corresponding to the effect in the advantageous state is read from the ROM 243, and the read data table is set in the effect execution area.

  In step S1610, a process of transmitting an effect command corresponding to the effect in the advantageous state to the display control device 212 is executed. The display control device 212 reads a data table for causing a series of movies corresponding to the production in the advantageous state to be performed on the display screen G based on the production command from the program ROM 253, and according to the read data table. The movie is reproduced on the display screen G.

  The playback time of the movie is set to, for example, 90 seconds, and the movie is repeatedly played back until the ending starts (until the advantageous state ends).

  Returning to the description of the effect control processing (FIG. 25), when the fluctuation command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S1307, and it is determined whether a count stop command has been received. As described above, the count stop command is set when the support (opening / closing operation) of the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a is started.

  If a count stop command has been received, a count stop process is executed in step S1308, and the flow advances to step S1315. In the count stop process, it is confirmed that the remaining advantageous time is counted down on the display screen G, and if the remaining advantageous time is counted down on the display screen G, the remaining advantageous time is counted down. Execute the process for temporarily stopping the.

  Specifically, a process of transmitting the count stop command as it is to the display control device 212 is executed. The display control device 212 confirms that the remaining advantageous time is being counted down based on the reception of the count stop command. Then, when it is confirmed that the countdown of the remaining advantageous time is being performed, the updating of the count display timer counter is prohibited, and the remaining advantageous time at that point is blinked.

  If a count stop command has not been received, the process advances to step S1309 to determine whether a count restart command has been received. As described above, the count restart command is set when the support of the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a ends.

  If a count restart command has been received, count restart processing is executed in step S1310, and the flow advances to step S1315. In the count resuming process, it is confirmed on the display screen G that the countdown of the remaining advantageous time is temporarily stopped, and if the countdown of the remaining advantageous time is temporarily stopped, the countdown of the remaining advantageous time is temporarily stopped. Execute the processing for canceling.

  Specifically, a process for transmitting the count restart command as it is to the display control device 212 is executed. The display control device 212 cancels the prohibition of the update of the count display timer counter based on the reception of the count restart command, and lights up the remaining advantageous time.

  According to this configuration, the countdown of the remaining advantageous time, in particular, the updating of the count display timer counter is not performed during the support of the second electric accessory 42a and the third electric accessory 43a. Thus, the remaining advantageous time displayed on the display screen G can be synchronized with the deviation change display time in the main control device 101.

  Further, the present invention is not limited to the above-described configuration. For example, the main control device 101 may periodically transmit a command in which information on the deviated change display time is set to the display control device 212 via the sound emission control device 102 It may be.

  Further, a real-time clock may be provided in the display control device 212 and the time may be grasped by the real-time clock. The point is that the deviation change display time can be grasped, the deviation change display time is counted down, and the countdown display is stopped during the support of the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a. Then, the specific processing is optional.

  If a count restart command has not been received, the process advances to step S1311 to determine whether an ending command has been received. The ending command is a command set when the advantageous state ends, as described above.

  If an ending command has been received, ending is started in step S1312, and the flow advances to step S1315. Specifically, a data table corresponding to the ending is stored in the various data table storage area 271 of the ROM 243 of the sound emission control device 102 and the program ROM 253 of the display control device 212, respectively. In step S1312, a data table corresponding to the ending is read from the various data table storage area 271, and the read data table is set in the effect execution area.

  In step S1312, a process of transmitting an effect command corresponding to the ending to the display control device 212 is executed. The display control device 212 reads, from the program ROM 253, a data table for causing an ending movie corresponding to the ending to be performed on the display screen G based on the above-mentioned production command, and displays the ending movie in accordance with the read data table. Playback is performed on screen G. The playback time of the ending movie is set to 2 seconds.

  If the ending command has not been received, the process advances to step S1313 to determine whether it is the ending end timing. If it is the ending end timing, the process advances to step S1314 to execute a hold announcement effect determination process, and then advances to step S1315. In the hold announcement effect determination processing, the processing of steps S1503 to S1509 of the release command corresponding processing (FIG. 27) is executed. Thereby, when the hold command information relating to the next game time has been acquired, the hold announcement effect is executed. The hold announcement effect corresponds to the hold information that triggered the change display in the first unit area 71 after the elapse of the standby time.

  In step S1315, other processing based on the reception of the other command is executed. The other processes include a light emission control process when a command relating to each of the holding lamp units 91 to 93 is received, and a process of setting and erasing various flags such as a game-time flag and an open flag. Then, after executing the processing of step S1315, the present pending command handling processing ends.

<Relationship between game flow and various effects and display mode displayed on display screen G>
Next, the relationship between the flow of the game and various effects and the display mode displayed on the display screen G will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 29 (a) shows winning in the first through gate 51, FIG. 29 (b) shows the presence / absence of a variable display of the first unit area 71, and FIG. 29 (c) shows the support of the first electric accessory 41a. 29 (d) shows the execution timing of the time reduction normal production, FIG. 29 (e) shows the execution timing of the normal reservation advance production, and FIG. 29 (f) shows the execution timing of the time reduction advance reservation production. 29 (g) shows the execution timing of the effect in the advantageous state, FIG. 29 (h) shows the opening / closing manner of the second electric accessory 42a, and FIG. 29 (i) shows the ending execution timing.

  30A and 30B are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display mode of the display screen G at each timing. Specifically, FIG. 30A shows the timing of t33, FIG. 30B shows the timing of t35, and FIG. (C) is a display screen at a timing of t36, FIG. 30 (d) is a timing of t37, FIG. 30 (e) is a timing of t38, FIG. 30 (f) is a timing of t39, and FIG. 30 (g) is a display screen at a timing of t41. 9 shows a display mode of G. In FIGS. 30 (e) to 30 (g), although the movie is actually reproduced, the display of the movie image is omitted for convenience of explanation.

  First, as shown in FIG. 29 (a), a prize to the first through gate 51 occurs at a timing of t31 when the support for each of the electric auditors products 41a to 43a is not performed even during the game time. In this case, as shown in FIG. 29B, a game round (variable display of ordinary symbols in the first unit area 71) is started. This game time is a winning game time.

  Also, at the timing of t31, since the electric auditors products 41a to 43a are not supported during the game time, the winning game time is started almost simultaneously with winning the first through gate 51. Therefore, the hold command information and the winning variation command are transmitted to the audio light emission control device 102 almost simultaneously. In this case, the pending command processing is performed before the variable command processing.

  More specifically, the number-of-holds storage area K is incremented by one, and after the hold command information is stored in the first unit storage area 261a of the hold command information storage area 261, the number-of-holds storage area K is decremented by one. The held command information is stored in the execution area 261e. Then, as shown in FIG. 29 (d), a time reduction normal effect is started.

  Thereafter, at time t32, a winning in the first through gate 51 occurs, and the first electric win counter C1 is acquired. As a result, the hold command is transmitted from main controller 101, and the hold command information is stored in hold command information storage area 261. The first electric win counter C1 acquired this time corresponds to the winning value. That is, the next game time is a winning game time.

  As described above, when a hold command is received during the game, the time-saving hold announcement effect is not executed (see step S1403 of the hold command corresponding process (FIG. 26)). For this reason, the time-saving normal effect and the time-saving reservation notice effect do not occur at the same time.

  At the timing of t33, the winning game time ends, and the support of the first electric auditors product 41a is started (see FIG. 29C). Specifically, the first electric accessory 41a is opened. In this case, a release command is transmitted, and a release command corresponding process is executed. As a result, a hold announcement effect corresponding to the next game time, specifically, the hold command information acquired at the timing of t32, specifically, a normal hold announcement effect, is executed, as shown in FIG. In addition, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3.

  After that, at the timing t34 when the opening time (6 seconds) of the first electric auditors product 41a has elapsed, the support of the first electric auditors product 41a ends. Specifically, the first electric accessory 41a is closed. Then, the game time based on the hold information acquired at the timing of t32, specifically, the winning game time is started. After that, the winning game time ends at the timing of t35 when the winning variation display time of the ordinary symbol in the first unit area 71 has elapsed, and the support of the first electric accessory 41a is started.

  Here, the effect time of the normal hold announcement effect is set to the sum of the opening time of the first motor-driven accessory 41a and the winning fluctuation display time, so that the normal hold advance effect is performed at the timing of t35. finish. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 30 (b), the combination of the missing decorative symbols is stopped and displayed.

  At the timing of t36, a winning in the first through gate 51 occurs, and the first electric win counter C1 is acquired. The first electric win counter C1 corresponds to an outlier. Based on the acquisition of the first electric win counter C1, a hold command relating to the next game time is transmitted. In this case, since the first electric auditors product 41a is being opened, a time-saving on-hold announcement effect, in particular, a time-saving advantageous on-hold announcement effect is started. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 30C, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. The effect time of the above-mentioned time-saving advantage hold announcement effect is set to a time slightly shorter than the remaining opening time of the first electric auditors product 41a.

  Thereafter, the time-saving advantage advance notice effect ends at the timing of t37, which is a timing slightly before the timing of t38 when the first electric accessory 41a is closed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 30 (d), the combination of the big hit decorative symbols is stopped and displayed on one activated line (specifically, the line L4 falling to the right). As a result, it is possible to grasp that the state is shifted to the advantageous state, specifically, that the next game time is out of play.

  Then, at the timing of t38, the first electric accessory 41a is closed, and the off-play game starts.

  According to such a configuration, when the opening of the first electric auditors product 41a based on the predetermined winning game operation and the next game operation are continuous, the next game operation is performed using the opening time of the first electric accessory 41a. Is performed. Thereby, the production time of the effect related to the game time can be secured longer than the game time, and the effect related to the game time can be diversified.

  Here, in order to achieve a smooth progress of the game, it is preferable to set a short game time. In particular, in the present embodiment, since the winning game times are performed more frequently than the off game times, by setting the winning game time to be shorter than the off game time, the smooth progress of the game can be achieved. it can. However, if the winning game round time is set short, the effects related to the game round performed on the display screen G, in particular, the type of the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is limited, and the degree of attention to the variable display of the decorative symbol decreases. There is a possibility that.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the effects related to the winning game times (various normal reservation notice effects) are started during the support based on the winning game times executed at a timing earlier than the winning game times. You. As a result, it is possible to secure an effect time for performing an effect related to the winning game time, so that it is possible to shorten the time for the winning game while securing diversification of the effect related to the winning game time. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the effects related to the winning game times while smoothly progressing the game.

  Further, at the timing of t38, the deviation change command is transmitted, and the effect in the advantageous state is started based on the deviation change command. Specifically, the movie is repeatedly played on the display screen G.

  Further, based on the start of the effect during the advantageous state, the display of the remaining advantageous time is started as shown in FIG. The remaining advantageous time is counted down with the deviation display time as an initial value.

  Thereafter, when the support of the second electric accessory 42a is started at the timing of t39, the countdown of the remaining advantageous time is temporarily stopped. In this case, as shown in FIG. 30 (f), the remaining advantageous time at the temporary stop timing blinks. The blinking status is indicated by an underline due to the drawing.

  Then, when the support of the second electric accessory 42a ends at the timing of t40, the countdown of the remaining advantageous time is restarted.

  At the timing of t41, the off-play game time ends. In this case, the countdown is completed, and a message indicating that the remaining advantageous time is “0” is displayed as shown in FIG.

  Further, although not shown, at the timing of t41 (end timing of the out-of-game time), the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is performed in the second unit area 72. Therefore, the effect during the advantageous state is continued as it is. Note that the normal symbols in the third unit area 73 are not displayed in a variable manner.

  After that, the support of the second electric accessory 42a based on the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbol in the second unit area 72 starts, and when the support ends at the timing of t42, the advantageous state ends. In this case, the production in the advantageous state ends, and the ending movie is played.

  Subsequently, when the ending movie ends at the timing of t43, a hold announcement effect is started. The hold announcement effect is based on the next game time, specifically, based on the hold command information stored in the first unit storage area 261a in the hold command information storage area 261. If the next game time is a winning game time, a normal suspension notice effect is executed.

  Then, the standby time elapses at the timing of t44, and the normal hold announcement effect ends.

  That is, the standby time (8 sec) is set to a time obtained by adding the ending effect time (2 sec) and the hold notice effect effect time (6 sec). Thereby, during the standby time, it is possible to perform an ending and a hold announcement effect corresponding to the next game time for the missed game time.

  Note that the present invention is not limited to the above configuration, and for example, a configuration without ending may be used. Thereby, the time between the off-going game time and the next game time can be shortened. Therefore, the game can be smoothly advanced.

  In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which a time-saving on-hold announcement effect is performed instead of the on-hold announcement effect. Thereby, the time between the off-going game time and the next game time can be further reduced. Further, instead of the hold announcement effect, a configuration in which a normal time reduction effect is performed in the next game time for the off-game time may be adopted. In this case, the time required for the hold notice effect can be omitted, and the time between the off-going game time and the next game time can be further reduced. However, if attention is paid to the viewpoint of the diversity of effects related to the next game time with respect to the missed game time, it is more preferable to set the time between the missed game time and the next game time to be long.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  The variable display can be independently performed in each of the unit areas 71 to 73. When the winning variable display is completed in the first unit area 71, the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 are displayed. The variable display is reset so that a new variable display is not started in the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 after that. Thus, it is possible to provide a novel game in which each support lottery is independently performed and each support lottery result is related.

  Further, when the winning variation display of the second unit area 72 or the third unit area 73 ends, the counting of the variation display time in the variation display of the other unit areas is temporarily stopped, and thereafter, the winning variation display is performed. The counting is restarted based on the end of the support. This makes it possible to avoid the occurrence of support for another electric auditorium while supporting one electric auditorium while utilizing the support lottery result and the variable display time until the suspension.

  Furthermore, when the variation display of the second unit area 72 or the third unit area 73 is finished, the counting of the variation display time in the variation display of the other unit areas is not temporarily stopped. Thereby, the variable display of the other unit areas can be noticed, and the variable display of each unit area can be noticed stepwise.

  In addition, the winning variable display time of the first unit area 71 is set shorter than the variable display time of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73, and the variable display time of the first unit area 71 deviating from the second unit area 72 is set. And the variable display time of the third unit area 73 is set longer. Accordingly, when the winning variation display is performed in the first unit area 71, the support of the first electric auditors goods 41a is performed with priority over the support of the second electric auditors goods 42a or the third electric auditors goods 43a. On the other hand, when the departure variation display is performed in the first unit area 71, the support of the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a is preferentially performed. I have. Therefore, which support is preferentially performed can be determined according to the variable display mode of the first unit area 71.

  By passing through the through-gates 51 to 53, the variable design of the normal symbol is performed independently in each of the unit areas 71 to 73. Further, after passing through the first through-gate 51, the second symbol is passed. These positional relationships are set so as to pass through the second through-gate 52 or the third through gate 53. Thus, it is possible to provide a novel game that actively performs an event in which the variable display of the first unit area 71 and the variable display of the second unit area 72 or the third unit area 73 occur simultaneously.

  In such a configuration, a regulating nail 64b is provided so that the game ball does not pass through the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53 without passing through the first through gate 51. Thus, an event in which only the variable display of the second unit region 72 or the third unit region 73 is performed can be avoided, and the simultaneous variable display can be suitably performed.

  Further, since the start timing of the variable display of the first unit area 71 tends to be earlier than the start timing of the variable display of the second unit area 72 or the third unit area 73, the winning variable display of the first unit area 71 is performed. , It is easier to finish before the variable display of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73. Thereby, the support of the 1st electric auditors product 41a can be made to give priority to the support of the 2nd electric auditors product 42a or the 3rd electric auditors product 43a.

  During the support of the first electric accessory 41a, it is configured to notify whether or not an advantageous state is to be achieved, and more specifically, to perform a hold announcement effect for notifying the support lottery result that triggered the next game round. As a result, the effect time of the effect related to the game time can be secured longer than the game time, and the effect for notifying the support lottery result can be diversified.

  In particular, if the game time is shortened from the viewpoint of improving the digestibility of the game, the effect time of the effect related to the game time tends to be short. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to secure the effect time of the effect related to the game time longer than the game time, so that the effect of the game time is diversified while increasing the digestion rate of the game. Can be achieved.

  Further, when the game time is a winning game time, the first electric accessory 41a is configured to be supported after the end of the winning game time, and the first unit area 71 is supported during the support of the first electric accessory 41a. , A new variable display is not started. In this case, between the predetermined game time and the next game time, the time required to support the first electric accessory 41a may inevitably occur. In such a configuration, the hold announcement effect is configured to be performed over the time related to the support and the game time, so that the time that may occur inevitably can be suitably used. Thereby, it is possible to perform the hold announcement effect by appropriately using the time related to the support of the first electric auditors product 41a.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the advantageous state is a state in which the deviation variation display is being performed in the first unit area 71. Therefore, the effect related to the game time starts the deviation variation display in the first unit area 71. It needs to be started at a timing before it is done. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, various types of hold announcement effects as effects related to the game times are performed using the support time on the front side of the game times related to the hold information that was the target of the effect. Has become. Thus, it is possible to perform an effect related to the number of game times before the deviation change display is performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect related to the game time from being rendered meaningless by performing the effect related to the game time after shifting to the advantageous state.

  A second electric win winning opening 42 and a third electric winning winning opening 43 are provided, and the winning frequencies of the two are different depending on the firing mode of the game ball. Specifically, the second electrical winning hole 42 and the third electrical winning opening 43 are arranged at predetermined intervals in the horizontal direction. As a result, a game in which the shooting mode of the game ball is changed according to which support is performed is performed. Therefore, the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

  In such a configuration, the second electric accessory 42a and the third electric accessory 43a are configured to be opened for a short time based on the start of the support and then opened for a long time. Thereby, the player can grasp the support target this time by confirming that the opening has been performed for a short time. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately perform the notification of the distinction to the second winning part 42 and the third winning part 43.

  In particular, the configuration is such that the support of the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a ends based on the sum of the short-time opening and the long-time opening serving as the upper limit opening time. In this case, since the release for the separate notification is a short-time release, a long release time for the long-time release can be secured. As a result, it is possible to suitably perform the notification of the distinction with the electric accessory while securing the profit of the player.

  In addition, the configuration is such that the privilege given to the player is larger when the support lottery result using the first electric combination counter C1 is a result of deviation. Specifically, when the winning variation display of the first unit area 71 is performed, the support of the first electric accessory 41a based on the winning variation display is performed by the second electric accessory 42a and the third electric accessory 43a. This is performed prior to the support, and the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a is supported during the deviation change display of the first unit area 71. And, the privilege given to the player is greater for the support of the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a than for the support of the first electric accessory 41a. As a result, unexpectedness can be given to the game.

  In particular, since the departure change display time of the first unit area 71 is an advantageous time, and the advantageous state ends when the advantageous time has elapsed, the player can set the second electric combination within the advantageous time. The support of the object 42a and the third electric combination 43a is to be generated more times. As a result, it is possible to increase the gambling spirit of the player and increase the digestibility of the game.

  In addition, the deviation display time (advantageous time) of the first unit area 71 is varied. As a result, the number of times of support of the second electric accessory 42a and the third electric accessory 43a varies in the first unit area 71. It is assumed that attention is paid to the deviation change display time. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the deviation display of the first unit region 71.

  In particular, the display screen G is configured to perform a countdown display of the deviation change display time. Thereby, the player can easily grasp the remaining advantageous time.

<Second embodiment>
In the present embodiment, a game board, a configuration related to a lottery, and a change start process are different. The different points will be described below. The detailed description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is omitted.

  First, the gaming board 300 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 31A is a front view of the gaming board 300, FIG. 31B is a schematic cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 301, and FIG. 31C is a schematic cross-sectional view of the second variable winning device 302.

  A plurality of large and small openings that penetrate in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing as in the first embodiment are formed in a range defined as a game area on the game board 300. In each opening, a first variable winning device 301, a second variable winning device 302, an upper operating port 303 corresponding to the first through gate 51 in the first embodiment, the second through gate 52 or the second through gate 52 in the first embodiment. A lower operating port 304, a variable display unit 305, a main display unit 306, and the like corresponding to the three through gates 53 are provided. A nail 307 is provided in the game area.

  When a ball (winning) occurs in the first variable prize device 301, the second variable prize device 302, the upper operating port 303, and the lower operating port 304, it is detected by a detection sensor ( (Not shown), and a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out based on the detection result. In this case, when a ball enters the upper operating port 303 and when a ball enters the lower operating port 304, payout of three prize balls is executed, and entry into the first variable winning device 301 is performed. When a ball occurs and when a ball enters the second variable winning device 302, 15 payout balls are paid out. However, the number of these prize balls is arbitrary. For example, the number of prize balls in both operation ports 303 and 304 is larger than the number of prize balls in the lower operation port 304 than in the upper operation port 303. They may be different. Further, for example, the number of prize balls according to the second variable prize device 302 is larger than the number of prize balls according to the first variable prize device 301, or the first variable prize device 301 is larger than the number of prize balls according to the second variable prize device 302. The variable prize winning devices 301 and 302 may differ in the number of prize balls, for example, such that the number of prize balls according to the present invention is large.

  Both the upper working port 303 and the lower working port 304 are open upward. The two working ports 303 and 304 are arranged in a vertical direction with the upper working port 303 facing upward. Each of the operation ports 303 and 304 is arranged at the center of the game area and below the variable display unit 305. A guide nail 307a is provided to guide the game ball toward each of the operating ports 303 and 304 by colliding with the game ball fired from the game ball firing mechanism 27. In this case, the expected degree of winning in each of the operating ports 303 and 304 does not differ according to the position at which the game ball fired from the game ball firing mechanism 27 reaches the upper part of the game area. That is, it is not possible to aim and fire the game ball so that the winning in one operating port occurs more frequently than the winning in the other operating port.

  Here, the variable display unit 305 is provided with a center frame 305a, and the center frame 305a is provided with a stage 305b in which a guide passage 305c is formed. Both operating ports 303 and 304 are arranged below the outlet of the guide passage 305c. That is, from the upper side to the lower side (toward the flowing direction of the game ball), the outlet of the guide passage 305c, the upper working port 303, and the lower working port 304 are arranged in this order. As a result, game balls drawn out from the exit of the guide passage 305c can easily enter the upper working port 303. Due to the guide passage 305c, the winning frequency to the upper working port 303 is higher than the winning frequency to the lower working port 304.

  The main display unit 306 includes a first result display unit 306a for specifying the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning in the upper operating port 303, and an internal result performed based on the winning in the lower operating port 304. A second result display section 306b for specifying the lottery result is set. Note that, in addition to the result display units 306a and 306b, the main display unit 306 displays a round game in the opening / closing execution mode when the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the round game (or the opening / closing execution mode) is set. A round display unit for specifying the number of times may be provided.

  In the first result display unit 306a, the change display of the specific symbol (specific pattern) is performed with the winning of the upper operation port 303 as a trigger, and the change is stopped based on the winning of the upper operation port 303 as a stop result of the fluctuation display. The displayed internal lottery results are clearly displayed. If the internal lottery result based on the winning in the upper operating port 303 is a result corresponding to the shift to the open / close execution mode, the specific stop result is displayed on the first result display unit 306a, and the variable display is stopped. Then, the mode is shifted to the first opening / closing execution mode.

  In the second result display unit 306b, the display of the change of the pattern (specific design) is performed with the winning of the lower operating port 304 as a trigger, and based on the winning of the lower operating port 304 as a stop result of the variable display. The result of the internal lottery is clearly indicated by the display. If the internal lottery result based on the winning in the lower operating port 304 is a result corresponding to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, a specific stop result is displayed on the second result display unit 306b, and the variable display is stopped. After that, the mode shifts to the second opening / closing execution mode.

  Note that the main display unit 306 is configured by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, Other types of display devices such as a CRT and a dot matrix may be used. Further, as the pattern variably displayed on the main display unit 306, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, or a plurality of types. A configuration in which different colors are switched and displayed may be considered.

  In addition, based on the winning in the upper operating port 303, the variable display is started on the main display unit 306 and the symbol display device 81, and a predetermined stop result is displayed. Equivalent to times.

  In the lower left area on the front side of the center frame 305a, a first holding lamp unit 311 corresponding to the first result display unit 306a is provided. The number of game balls winning in the upper operation port 303 is held up to a maximum of four, and the number of the held balls is displayed by lighting of the first holding lamp unit 311. Further, a second holding lamp unit 312 corresponding to the second result display unit 306b is provided on the lower right side on the front side of the center frame 305a. The number of game balls that have won the lower operation port 304 is held up to a maximum of four, and the number of held balls is displayed by turning on the second holding lamp unit 312.

  The first variable winning device 301 provided above the variable display unit 305 (that is, above the display screen G of the symbol display device 81) is, as shown in FIG. And a first opening / closing door 301b that opens and closes the first special winning opening 301a.

  The first opening / closing door 301b is connected to a first variable winning drive unit 301c integrally provided as a first variable winning device 301 (connection portions are not shown). The first variable winning drive unit 301c is electrically connected to the main control device 101, and closes (closes) and opens the first opening / closing door 301b based on a drive signal from the main control device 101. (Open state). More specifically, the game ball is normally in a closed state where it cannot be won, and the game ball can be won if it is determined that the shift to the first opening / closing execution mode has been won in the internal lottery based on the winning in the upper operating port 303. It can be switched to the open state.

  In the first variable winning device 301, a first passing portion 301d is formed at a position where a game ball that has won the first variable winning device 301 through the first large winning opening 301a always passes therethrough. The winning detection sensor 301e is provided such that the detection unit exists at the position of the first passing unit 301d. The game balls that have won the first variable winning device 301 are individually detected by the winning detection sensor 301e. The winning detection sensor 301e is electrically connected to the main control device 101, and the detection result of the winning detection sensor 301e is output to the main control device 101.

  The second variable winning device 302 provided below the variable display unit 305 (that is, below the display screen G of the symbol display device 81) is, as shown in FIG. And a second opening / closing door 302b that opens and closes the second big winning opening 302a.

  The second opening / closing door 302b is connected to a second variable winning drive unit 302c integrally provided as a second variable winning device 302 (connection portions are not shown). The second variable winning drive unit 302c is electrically connected to the main control device 101, and based on a drive signal from the main control device 101, sets the second opening / closing door 302b to one of a closed state and an open state. Let it be placed. Specifically, the game ball is normally in a closed state where the game ball cannot be won, and the game ball can be won in the case of winning the transition to the second opening / closing execution mode in the internal lottery based on the winning in the lower operation port 304. It can be switched to the open state. That is, the variable winning device in which the opening / closing operation is performed is different between the first opening / closing execution mode and the second opening / closing execution mode.

  In the second variable winning device 302, a second passing portion 302d is formed at a position where a game ball which has won the second variable winning device 302 through the second big winning opening 302a always passes. The winning detection sensor 302e is provided so that the detection unit is present at the position of the second passing unit 302d. The game balls that have won the second variable winning device 302 are individually detected by the winning detection sensor 302e. The winning detection sensor 302e is electrically connected to the main control device 101, and the detection result of the winning detection sensor 302e is output to the main control device 101.

  Here, the first variable winning device 301 is configured so that no winning occurs. Specifically, a plurality of restriction nails 307b for restricting winning in the first variable winning device 301 are provided in the game area. The restriction nail 307b is provided so as to cover the first winning hole 301a from the base side in the downflow direction of the game ball, specifically from above, and the distance between adjacent restriction nails 307b is the diameter of the game ball. It is set smaller than. As a result, even if the first opening / closing door 301b is opened, no prize is won in the first big winning opening 301a.

<About the configuration of various counters>
Next, various counters used in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  The MPU 202 uses a variety of counter information during the game to perform a jackpot occurrence lottery, display setting on the main display unit 306, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 32, the jackpot used for the jackpot occurrence lottery A random number counter C11, a jackpot type counter C12 used for determining a jackpot type such as a multi-round result or a small round result having a different number of rounds, and a random number initial value counter CINI used for setting an initial value of the jackpot random number counter C11. And a fluctuation type counter CS for determining the deviation fluctuation display time of the main display unit 306.

  Each of the counters C11, C12, CINI, and CS is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 230. The RAM 204 has a reserved ball storage area 321 including a first reserved area Ra, a second reserved area Rb, a first execution area AE1, and a second execution area AE2. The values of the jackpot random number counter C11 and the jackpot type counter C12 are stored in the reserved ball storage area 321 in time series in accordance with the winning history of the game ball to the upper operating port 303 or the lower operating port 304. It has become.

  Each area will be described in detail. The first holding area Ra is a holding area for storing the values of the jackpot random number counter C11 and the jackpot type counter C12 in chronological order in accordance with the winning history of the game ball to the upper operating port 303. Further, the second holding area Rb is a holding area for storing the values of the jackpot random number counter C11 and the jackpot type counter C12 in a time-series manner in accordance with the winning history of the game ball to the lower operating port 304.

  The first reservation area Ra is composed of four storage areas, a first area Ra1 to a fourth area Ra4, and a first reservation number storage area RaN. With the four storage areas of the first area Ra1 to the fourth area Ra4, up to four winning histories of the game balls to the upper operating port 303 are reserved and stored. Specifically, when a winning in the upper operating port 303 occurs a plurality of times in succession, each numerical information is displayed in time series in the order of the first area Ra1, the second area Ra2, the third area Ra3, and the fourth area Ra4. It is stored in.

  The first reserved number storage area RaN is a storage area for storing the number of areas used, that is, the number of game balls winning in the upper operating port 303 and retained. Specifically, any numerical value from 0 to 4 is stored in the first reserved number storage area RaN, and by grasping the numerical value, the winning history to the upper operating port 303 is retained and stored. Figure out how many

  The first execution area AE1 is an area for moving each value stored in the storage area of the first holding area Ra when starting the variable display of the first result display section 306a of the main display section 306, At the start of the variable display of the first result display unit 306a, a determination as to whether or not a hit is made is made based on various numerical information stored in the first execution area AE1.

  The second reserved area Rb includes four storage areas, a first area Rb1 to a fourth area Rb4, and a second reserved number storage area RbN. These configurations are the same as those of the first reserved area Ra and the first reserved number storage area RaN, and thus description thereof is omitted.

  The second execution area AE2 is an area for moving each value stored in the storage area of the second holding area Rb when starting the variable display of the second result display section 306b of the main display section 306, At the start of the variable display of the second result display unit 306b, a determination as to whether or not a hit is made is made based on various numerical information stored in the second execution area AE2.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The jackpot random number counter C11 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 599, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 599). In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C11 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C11. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C11, and is updated periodically (value = 0 to 599). The jackpot random number counter C11 is updated periodically, and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 321 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operating port 303 or the lower operating port 304. More specifically, the game ball is stored in the first holding area Ra of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins in the upper working port 303, and is stored in the second holding area Rb of the RAM 204 when the game ball wins in the lower working port 304. .

  Here, the winning value corresponding to the jackpot winning is predetermined. Specifically, two values are set as outliers, and a numerical value excluding these outliers is set as a winning value. That is, the winning result of the jackpot lottery is 598/600. The value and number of outliers are arbitrary.

  The jackpot type counter C12 is configured to be incremented by one in order within the range of 0 to 29, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 29). The jackpot type counter C12 is periodically updated, and is stored in the first holding area Ra of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball enters the upper working port 303, and is stored at the timing when the game ball wins at the lower working port 304. It is stored in Rb.

  Here, in the present embodiment, a multi-round result and a small round result, in which the number of round games performed is different, are set as the jackpot type, and the jackpot type counter C12 is assigned to one of the round results. Used for In the round game, the opening and closing operations of the variable winning devices 301 and 302 are performed until a predetermined end condition is satisfied. Specifically, in the round game, (A) the opening time of each of the special winning openings 301a and 302a becomes a predetermined upper limit opening time (for example, 10 seconds), or (B) to each of the special winning openings 301a and 302a. Becomes a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 10).

  Here, while only the small round result is set for the jackpot type related to the transition to the second opening / closing execution mode, the large round result and the small round result are set for the jackpot type related to the transition to the first opening / closing execution mode. Is set. When shifting to the first opening / closing execution mode, the result is assigned to one of the multi-round result and the small-round result using the jackpot type counter C12.

  The distribution destination of the jackpot result for the jackpot type counter C12 is stored in the ROM 203 as a distribution table. The distribution table is a table set so that the value of the jackpot type counter C12 and the distribution destination are uniquely determined. Specifically, among the jackpot type counters C12, “0 to 28” corresponds to a small round result, and “29” corresponds to a multiple round result. The distribution of the numerical values is arbitrary.

<Regarding Various Processes Executed by Main Controller 101>
Next, various processes executed by the main control device 101 in the present embodiment will be described below.

  Various processes in this embodiment are basically the same as those in the first embodiment.

  Specifically, when a winning in the upper operating port 303 is detected in the timer interrupt processing, the current values of the jackpot random number counter C11 and the jackpot type counter C12 are replaced with the values of the empty areas of the first reservation area Ra. Store for the first area. Then, the hold command information is set based on the acquired jackpot random number counter C11.

  On the other hand, when a winning in the lower operating port 304 is detected, the current values of the jackpot random number counter C11 and the jackpot type counter C12 are stored in the first of the free areas of the second reservation area Rb. I do.

  In the normal processing, the jackpot lottery and the variable display of the specific symbol in each of the result display units 306a and 306b of the main display unit 306 are independently performed based on the hold information stored in each of the hold areas Ra and Rb. And let them do it. The jackpot lottery corresponds to the support lottery in the first embodiment, and the variable display of the specific symbol in each of the result display units 306a and 306b corresponds to the variable display of the normal symbol in each of the unit areas 71 to 73 in the first embodiment. I do.

  If the jackpot lottery result of the hold information stored in the first hold area Ra is a winning result, a stop result corresponding to the winning result is displayed on the first result display unit 306a after the elapse of the variable display time. After the variable display is ended, the mode is shifted to the first opening / closing execution mode. In the first opening / closing execution mode, a round game is executed once or a plurality of times. Specifically, when the type of the jackpot result that has triggered the transition to the first opening / closing execution mode this time is a small round result, the round game is executed only once. On the other hand, if the type of the jackpot result that triggered the shift to the first opening / closing execution mode this time is a multi-round result, the round game is executed only three times over a predetermined interval time (for example, 1 sec). . In the round game in the first opening / closing execution mode, an opening / closing operation is performed on the first special winning opening 301a.

  On the other hand, if the jackpot lottery result of the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb is a winning result, the stop result corresponding to the winning result is displayed on the second result display unit 306b after the elapse of the variable display time. After the variable display has been terminated, the mode is shifted to the second opening / closing execution mode. In the second opening / closing execution mode, a round game is executed only once. In the round game in the second opening / closing execution mode, an opening / closing operation is performed on the second special winning opening 302a.

  As described above, regardless of the opening / closing state of the first special winning opening 301a, it is not possible to win a game ball to the first special winning opening 301a, while the game ball to the second large winning opening 302a being opened. Winning is allowed. For this reason, in the first opening / closing execution mode, it is difficult to give a privilege to the player, whereas in the second opening / closing execution mode, the privilege is easily given to the player. Note that the first opening / closing execution mode corresponds to the support of the first electric accessory 41a in the first embodiment, and the second opening / closing execution mode corresponds to the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a in the first embodiment. Respond to support.

  Further, in the present embodiment, based on the fact that the second opening / closing execution mode is performed (the completion of the winning variation display on the second result display unit 306b), the variation display time of the first result display unit 306a is measured. Is temporarily stopped, and based on the end of the second open / close execution mode, the measurement of the variable display time is restarted from the paused state.

  On the other hand, based on the fact that the first opening / closing execution mode is performed (the completion of the winning variation display on the first result display unit 306a), the variation display of the specific symbol on the second result display unit 306b and the trigger of the variation display The large jackpot lottery result is reset, and a change display of a new specific symbol is not started until the first opening / closing execution mode ends.

  With these configurations, it is possible to realize the gaming properties shown in the first embodiment.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, the order of winning the upper working port 303 and the lower working port 304 is random. Even in this case, the winning fluctuation display of the first result display unit 306a based on the winning in the upper operating port 303 is earlier than the deviation fluctuation display of the second result displaying unit 306b based on the winning in the lower operating port 304. Is configured to be easily finished. The specific configuration will be described below.

<First special map change start process>
First, the first special figure change start processing executed in the first special figure corresponding processing related to the display control of the first result display unit 306a will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The first special figure correspondence processing is executed once in the normal processing (FIG. 14), and the first special figure change start processing is specified by the first result display unit 306a in the first special figure correspondence processing. This is executed when it is specified to start the variable display of the symbol. In detail, the first special figure change start process is not in each open / close execution mode, not in the change display of the specific symbol in the first result display unit 306a, and is displayed in the first result display unit 306a to display the departure result. It is executed when it is not in the middle and that the hold information is stored in the first hold area Ra (RaN> 0).

  First, in step S1701, a process of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the first reserved number storage area RaN is executed.

  Thereafter, in step S1702, a data setting process for setting data stored in the first reservation area Ra for variable display is executed. Specifically, the data stored in the first area Ra1 of the first reservation area Ra is moved to the first execution area AE1.

  Then, the data stored in each of the areas Ra1 to Ra4 of the first reservation area Ra is shifted. Specifically, the data in each area is shifted to the lower area, such as the second area Ra2 → the first area Ra1, the third area Ra3 → the second area Ra2, and the fourth area Ra4 → the third area Ra3.

  In the following step S1703, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C11 stored in the first execution area AE1 matches a predetermined outlier.

  In step S1704, it is determined whether or not the result of the determination in step S1703 is a jackpot. If it is a big hit, in step S1705, a distribution determination of the big hit type is executed. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C12 among the information stored in the first execution area AE1 is grasped. Then, by referring to the distribution table, the jackpot result corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C12 acquired this time is grasped. Specifically, it is determined which of the multi-round result and the small round result has been won.

  In a succeeding step S1706, a process of setting a winning fluctuation display time of the first result display unit 306a is executed. Specifically, a predetermined fixed time (0.5 sec) is set as the winning fluctuation display time of the first result display unit 306a. Specifically, “125” is set in the first variable display time counter Tx provided in the various counter areas 235 of the RAM 204. The first variable display time counter Tx is updated so as to be decremented by 1 when the first result display unit 306a is performing variable display and is not in the second open / close execution mode in the first special figure corresponding process. As described above, since the first special map corresponding process is executed once in the normal process (FIG. 14), the first variable display time counter Tx is displayed on the first result display unit 306a. Is performed, when the second open / close execution mode is not set, the value is decremented by 1 in a 4 msec cycle which is an execution cycle of the normal processing. The MPU 202 recognizes that the variable display time has elapsed based on the fact that the first variable display time counter Tx becomes “0”, and executes a process of terminating the variable display on the first result display unit 306a.

  Thereafter, in step S1707, a winning variation command is set, and the flow advances to step S1710.

  On the other hand, if it is not a jackpot winning, in step S1708, the deviation change display time of the first result display unit 306a is determined. Specifically, while acquiring the current variation type counter CS and referring to the first table TD1 described in the first embodiment, the deviation variation display time is grasped.

  The first table TD1, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 33B, is a table in which the numerical range of the variation type counter CS is associated with the out-of-range variation display time. As in the first embodiment, different out-of-range fluctuation display times are set in the first table TD1 according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS. In step S1708, the fluctuation display time corresponding to the fluctuation type counter CS acquired by referring to the first table TD1 is grasped, and a numerical value corresponding to the grasped fluctuation display time is transmitted to the first fluctuation display time counter Tx. To set.

  After that, in step S1709, a deviation change command including information for specifying the deviation fluctuation display time is set, and the flow advances to step S1710.

  In step S1710, the variable display of the specific symbol is started on the first result display unit 306a. Then, the first special figure change start process is ended.

<2nd special map change start process>
Next, the second special figure change start processing executed in the second special figure corresponding processing related to the display control of the second result display unit 306b will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The second special figure corresponding processing is executed once after the execution of the first special figure corresponding processing in the normal processing (FIG. 14), and the second special figure change start processing is performed in the second special figure corresponding processing. This is executed when it is specified in the second result display unit 306b to start the variable display of the specific symbol. In detail, the second special figure change start processing is not in each opening / closing execution mode, not in the second result display unit 306b, and not in the change display of the specific symbol, and in the first result display unit 306a, displaying the departure result. It is executed when it is not in the middle and that the hold information is stored in the second hold area Rb (RbN> 0).

  First, in step S1801, a process of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the second reserved number storage area RbN is executed.

  After that, in step S1802, a data setting process for setting data stored in the second holding area Rb for variable display is executed. The data setting process is the same as the data setting process of the first special map change start process (FIG. 33), and thus the description is omitted.

  In a succeeding step S1803, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C11 stored in the second execution area AE2 matches a predetermined outlier.

  In a succeeding step S1804, it is determined whether or not the result of the success / failure determination in the step S1803 is a jackpot winning. If it is a big hit, in steps S1805 to S1807, a process of determining the variable display time of the second result display unit 306b is executed.

  Here, the variable display time of the second result display unit 306b is set to be different depending on the mode of the first result display unit 306a. Specifically, the variable display time set in the first result display unit 306a when the deviation display is being performed is set to be shorter than in the case where it is not.

  More specifically, first, in step S1805, it is determined whether or not the first result display unit 306a is displaying a deviating variation. If the first result display unit 306a is not displaying the fluctuation display, the process advances to step S1806 to execute a normal fluctuation display time determination process. In this process, the current variation type counter CS is obtained. Then, by referring to the normal table TD11 stored in the fluctuation display time table storage area 222 of the ROM 203, the fluctuation display time corresponding to the obtained fluctuation type counter CS is grasped.

  The normal table TD11 will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. The normal table TD11 is a table in which the numerical range of the fluctuation type counter CS and the fluctuation display time of the second result display unit 306b are associated with each other. In the normal table TD11, the variable display time is a time that is sufficiently longer than the winning fluctuation display time (0.5 sec) of the first result display unit 306a and the minimum deviation fluctuation display time (30 sec) of the first result display unit 306a. A plurality of types of time shorter than () are set. Specifically, 3.0, 5.0, and 7.0 seconds are set in the normal table TD11. In step S1806, by referring to the normal table TD11, the fluctuation display time corresponding to the obtained fluctuation type counter CS among the above fluctuation display times is grasped, and the numerical value corresponding to the grasped fluctuation display time is stored in the RAM 204. Is set for the second variable display time counter Ty provided in the various counter areas 235.

  The second variable display time counter Ty is updated to be decremented by one when the second result display unit 306b is performing variable display in the second special figure corresponding process. As described above, since the second special map corresponding process is executed once in the normal process (FIG. 14), the second variable display time counter Ty is displayed on the second result display unit 306b. Is performed, the value is decremented by one at a period of 4 msec, which is the execution period of the normal processing. The MPU 202 recognizes that the variable display time has elapsed based on the value of the second variable display time counter Ty becoming “0”, and executes a process of terminating the variable display on the second result display unit 306b.

  On the other hand, when the deviation display of the first result display unit 306a is being performed, the process advances to step S1807 to execute the time reduction display time determination process. In this process, the current variation type counter CS is obtained. Then, by referring to the time reduction table TD12 stored in the fluctuation display time table storage area 222 of the ROM 203, the fluctuation display time corresponding to the obtained fluctuation type counter CS is grasped.

  The time reduction table TD12 will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. The time saving table TD12 is a table in which the numerical range of the variation type counter CS and the variation display time of the second result display unit 306b are associated with each other. In the time reduction table TD12, a plurality of types of time shorter than the variable display time set in the normal table TD11 are set. Specifically, 0.7, 1.0, and 1.3 seconds are set in the time saving table TD12. In step S1807, by referring to the time reduction table TD12, the time corresponding to the obtained fluctuation type counter CS among the above-mentioned fluctuation display times is grasped, and the numerical value corresponding to the grasped fluctuation display time is set to the second fluctuation time. This is set for the display time counter Ty.

  Here, the variable display time set in the time reduction table TD12 is set shorter than the variable display time set in the normal table TD11. In some cases, the second result display unit 306b performs variable display that is shorter than in the normal case.

  In addition, as for the variable display time, if the minimum variable display time that can be selected in the normal variable display time determination processing is set longer than the maximum variable display time that can be selected in the time reduction variable display time determination processing, The number of types of time and variable display time is arbitrary.

  Further, the present invention is not limited to the above-described configuration. For example, the average fluctuation display time selected during the off-variation display of the first result display unit 306a may be set to be shorter than the average fluctuation display time when it is not.

  If the jackpot has not been won, a negative determination is made in step S1804, and the flow advances to step S1808. In step S1808, an off-variation display time determination process is performed. The outlier variable display time determination processing is the same as the normal variable display time determination processing, but is not limited thereto. For example, a different variable display time may be set.

  After the processing of step S1806, step S1807, or step S1808, the variation display of the specific symbol is started on the second result display unit 306b in step S1809, and the second special figure variation start process ends.

  Incidentally, in the jackpot result based on winning in the lower operating port 304, no jackpot type is provided. Therefore, the configuration related to the distribution determination is omitted.

<About the flow of the game and the effect of each of the above-mentioned fluctuation start processes>
Next, the flow of a game according to the present embodiment and the operation of each of the above-described fluctuation start processes will be described.

  First, a jackpot lottery is performed based on a winning in the upper operating port 303 or the lower operating port 304, and a change of a specific symbol corresponding to the jackpot lottery result in the first result display unit 306a or the second result display unit 306b. Display starts. The big hit lottery is almost won. If the variable display on the second result display unit 306b is being performed at the end timing of the winning variable display on the first result display unit 306a, the variable display and the jackpot lottery result related thereto are reset (erased). You. Then, the first opening / closing execution mode is started based on the end of the winning variation display on the first result display section 306a, and the variation display on the second result display section 306b is not started until the first opening / closing execution mode ends. Thereafter, when the first opening / closing execution mode ends, the variable display of the second result display unit 306b is newly started on condition that the hold information exists in the second hold area Rb.

  Here, the winning change display time of the first result display unit 306a is set shorter than the change display time of the second result display unit 306b. Therefore, the winning variation display on the first result display unit 306a is likely to end before the end timing of the variation display on the second result display unit 306b. Therefore, in a situation where the winning variation display is performed on the first result display unit 306a, the winning variation display ends without being reset on the second result display unit 306b, and an event of shifting to the second opening / closing execution mode is unlikely to occur. .

  In particular, as compared with the first embodiment, the variable display time of the second result display unit 306b selected when the deviation display of the first result display unit 306a is not being performed is the winning variable display of the first result display unit 306a. It is set much larger than the time. Accordingly, in the situation where the deviation change display of the first result display unit 306a is not performed, the change of the second result display unit 306b is performed irrespective of the randomness of the winning timing to the upper operation port 303 and the lower operation port 304. During the display, the winning display of the first result display unit 306a is easily ended.

  On the other hand, when the off-going fluctuation display is performed on the first result display section 306a, the off-going fluctuation display time of the first result display section 306a is set longer than the fluctuating display time of the second result display section 306b. The variation display on the second result display unit 306b is likely to end during the deviation variation display. When the winning variation display on the second result display unit 306b ends, the mode shifts to the second opening / closing execution mode, and the counting of the variation display time of the deviation variation display on the first result display unit 306a is temporarily stopped. Then, during the second opening / closing execution mode, a round game (opening / closing operation of the second special winning opening 302a) is performed, and the game ball wins the second special winning opening 302a. Thereby, a privilege is provided to the player.

  Then, at the end timing of the round game, if the deviation display is performed on the first result display unit 306a, the fluctuation display based on the new hold information may be performed after the second opening / closing execution mode ends. . In this case, if the variable display is the winning variable display, the second opening / closing execution mode is restarted based on the termination of the winning variable display. Thus, the second opening / closing execution mode can be performed a plurality of times in a situation where the first result display unit 306a is displaced and displayed. That is, the state in which the first result display unit 306a is displaying the departure variation is a state in which the second opening / closing execution mode is easily performed, and can be said to be an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player. The advantageous state includes at least the time during which the variable display is performed on the second result display unit 306b until the count of the deviation display time of the first result display unit 306a becomes “0”, and (2) The time including the time when the hold information does not exist in the hold area Rb is deviated and continues until the fluctuation display time is reached.

  Here, in a situation where winning timings to the upper operating port 303 and the lower operating port 304 are random, the fluctuation display of the second result display section 306b is reset due to the end of the winning fluctuation display of the first result display section 306a. To facilitate the display, the variable display time of the second result display unit 306b may be set as long as possible, as compared with the winning variable display of the first result display unit 306a. However, if the variable display time of the second result display unit 306b is lengthened, the interval for shifting to the second opening / closing execution mode in a situation where the deviation display is performed on the first result display unit 306a, that is, the first second opening / closing execution Since the interval between the mode and the next second opening / closing execution mode becomes large, smooth progress of the game is hindered, and there is a concern that the degree of attention to the game in the advantageous state may decrease.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the first result display unit 306a is displaying the deviating fluctuation, the fluctuation display time of the second result display unit 306b is set to be shorter than the normally selected fluctuation display time. You. As a result, the interval between the second opening / closing execution modes becomes shorter, so that a smooth progress of the game in the advantageous state is realized.

<Production control processing and opening / closing execution command processing>
Next, the effect control processing according to the present embodiment will be described.

  In the effect control processing of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not an opening / closing execution command has been received instead of the processing of step S1303 of the effect control processing (FIG. 25) of the first embodiment. The opening / closing execution command is a command set when shifting to the first opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the first game state transition processing is executed between the first special figure corresponding processing and the second special figure corresponding processing in the normal processing. In the first game state transition process, a process of transitioning to the first opening / closing execution mode is performed based on the completion of the winning variation display on the first result display unit 306a, and a process related to the round game, specifically, , A process related to opening and closing control of the first special winning opening 301a is executed. The opening / closing execution command is set in a process of shifting to the first opening / closing execution mode in the first game state shifting process. In the opening / closing execution command, information for specifying the type of the jackpot result that has triggered the current first opening / closing execution mode is set.

  In addition, an open / close execution command corresponding process is executed instead of the process of step S1304. The open / close execution command corresponding processing will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. Note that the processing of steps S1901 to S1905 is the same as the processing of steps S1502 to S1506 of the release command corresponding processing (FIG. 27), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In the present embodiment, different types of hold notice effects are set in correspondence with the setting of two jackpot results each having a different number of rounds as the number of round games performed in the first opening / closing execution mode. ing.

  Specifically, in step S1906, the number of rounds in the current first opening / closing execution mode is grasped. In detail, the type of the jackpot result which triggered the current first opening / closing execution mode is grasped based on the information included in the opening / closing execution command received this time. Then, the number of rounds corresponding to the type is grasped.

  In a succeeding step S1907, it is determined whether or not the number of rounds grasped in the step S1906 is a multi-round (three rounds). If it is not a multi-round, the process proceeds to step S1908 to start a hold announcement effect corresponding to the success / failure information grasped in step S1905, and ends the open / close execution command corresponding process.

  On the other hand, if the round is a multi-round, the process proceeds to step S1909, a reach hold announcement effect corresponding to the success / failure information grasped in step S1905 is started, and the main open / close execution command corresponding process ends. In the reach hold announcement effect, stop display of a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the success / failure information is performed after performing reach display as a variation display mode of the decorative symbols.

  Here, the reach display (reach state) is a variable display state that is likely to be an advantageous state at a stage before the stop result is derived and displayed after the start of the display of the change of the decorative symbol on the symbol display device 81. A display state that makes the user think

  In other words, there is a possibility that the combination of the big hit decorative symbols is realized by stopping and displaying the decorative symbols for some of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 81. This is a display state in which a certain combination of reach decorative symbols is displayed, and in that state, the symbols are changed and displayed in the remaining symbol rows.

  More specifically, as a pre-stage for terminating the variable display of the decorative symbol, a reach decoration in which a combination of the big hit decorative symbols may be established on a preset effective line in the display screen of the symbol display device 81. This is to form a reach line by stopping and displaying the combination of symbols, and to perform a variable display of the decorative symbol by the last stopped symbol column in a state where the reach line is formed.

  When the display contents of FIG. 8 are specifically described, first, the variable display of the decorative symbol is terminated in the upper symbol column Z1, and the variable symbol of the decorative symbol is terminated in the lower symbol column Z3. When the main symbols with the same numbers attached to the lines L1 to L5 are stopped and displayed, a reach line is formed, and in a state where the reach line is formed, the decorative symbol is fluctuated in the middle symbol row Z2. By doing so, it becomes reach display. Then, when an advantageous state occurs, specifically, when the variable display related to the reach display is a deviated variable display, the main symbol having the same number as the main symbol forming the reach line is the reach line. The variable display of the decorative symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 is ended by being stopped and displayed above.

  In the reach display, in the state where the combination of the reach decorative symbols is displayed as described above, the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner in the remaining symbol rows, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen. And those that perform reach display by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on almost the entire display screen G after reducing or hiding the combination of reach decorative symbols. It is.

  According to this configuration, if the hold information on the next game time has been acquired at the timing when the first opening / closing execution mode is started, the hold announcement effect is executed on the hold information on the next game time. Is done. In this case, one of the normal hold advance notice effect and the reach hold advance effect is selected as the hold advance effect according to the mode of the first opening / closing execution mode.

  Here, in the case of a multi-round result having a large number of rounds, the time required to complete the first open / close execution mode is longer than in the case of a small round result. Therefore, it is possible to secure a long time for performing the hold announcement effect, and it is possible to preferably perform the reach display. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the reservation notice effect, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention of the reservation notice effect.

  In the processing for responding to the hold command according to the present embodiment, processing for grasping the remaining open / close execution mode time is performed instead of the remaining open time. Specifically, when setting the hold command, the MPU 202 of the main control device 101 sets the round information and the remaining open time information (specifically, the numerical information of the timer counter) at the current time. Then, when the hold command is received, these pieces of information are stored, and the remaining open / close execution mode time is grasped based on the information.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  An upper working port 303 and a lower working port 304 are provided, and the first result display unit 306a and the second result display unit 306b independently perform variable display based on winning in each of the working ports 303 and 304. Then, when the winning variation display on the first result display unit 306a ends, the variation display on the second result display unit 306b is reset. This makes it possible to provide a novel game in which relevance is given to the determination result of the success / failure determination based on winning of each of the operating ports 303 and 304.

  When the winning variation display on the second result display unit 306b ends, the counting of the variation display time on the first result display unit 306a is temporarily stopped, and then the second opening / closing execution mode related to the winning variation display is switched to the second opening / closing execution mode. The above-described counting is restarted based on the termination. This prevents the first opening / closing execution mode and the second opening / closing execution mode from occurring at the same time while using the validity / non-permission judgment result relating to the variable display targeted for suspension and the variable display time until temporary suspension. be able to.

  When the game ball is fired aiming at the lower operating port 304, a winning in the upper operating port 303 can be generated. Thereby, it is possible to preferentially generate a prize to the lower operation port 304 and suppress an action that makes the game advantageous. Therefore, fairness of the game can be secured.

  That is, in order not to perform the winning variation display on the first result display unit 306a, but to perform the winning variation display on the second result display unit 306b, the winning in the upper operating port 303 is avoided. It is conceivable to aim for a prize in the lower operating port 304 while doing so. Specifically, it is conceivable that the game balls are fired so that the winning in the lower operating port 304 occurs more preferentially than the winning in the upper operating port 303. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the relative positional relationship between the upper working port 303 and the lower working port 304 is set so as to prevent aiming only at the lower working port 304, and both working ports 303 and 304 are set. There is provided a configuration for guiding game balls toward. As a result, it is possible to suppress the difference in the obtained privilege depending on the skill of the player, and the fairness of the game is ensured.

  The change display time of the second result display unit 306b in the situation where the off-variation display is being performed on the first result display unit 306a is longer than that in the case where the off-variation display is not being performed on the first result display unit 306a. Was also set short. As a result, in the situation where the deviation change display is not performed on the first result display unit 306a, the deviation fluctuation display is performed on the first result display unit 306a while suppressing the occurrence frequency of the second opening / closing execution mode. In the situation, the interval between the second opening / closing execution modes can be shortened. Therefore, the progress of the game can be made smooth.

  In the present embodiment, the first special winning opening 301a and the second special winning opening 302a are provided separately. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In this case, in the first opening / closing execution mode, the opening / closing mode of the special winning opening may be set such that no prize is won in the special winning opening or the winning frequency is lower than in the second opening / closing execution mode.

  In addition, for example, a movable object is provided at a position for restricting the entry of a game ball into the first winning opening and a position for not restricting the entering of the game ball, and the accessory is provided based on the first open / close execution mode. The accessory may be arranged at the restricted position, and the accessory may be arranged at the unregulated position based on the second open / close execution mode. The point is that the winning in the special winning opening is restricted while the first opening / closing execution mode is in progress, and the winning in the special winning opening is permitted in the situation in the second opening / closing execution mode.

  In the present embodiment, the number of rounds is changed to adjust the time in the first opening / closing execution mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the upper limit opening time of the first special winning opening 301a is set to By making them different from each other, the time during which the first opening / closing execution mode is set may be adjusted. However, when the upper limit opening time of the first special winning opening 301a per round game is set to a specific time (for example, 30 seconds), the time in the first opening / closing execution mode is within the range of the specific time. Becomes On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by executing a plurality of round games, a time longer than the specific time can be secured as the time in the first opening / closing execution mode. Diversification can be achieved.

  In addition, the winning probability of the jackpot lottery based on the winning in the upper operating port 303 may be different from the winning probability of the jackpot drawing based on the winning in the lower operating port 304. In this case, by adjusting both, the frequency at which the first opening / closing execution mode is performed and the frequency at which the second opening / closing execution mode is performed can be adjusted, and the management of the game can be performed appropriately.

  In addition, the winning probability of the jackpot lottery based on the winning in the lower operating port 304 in a situation where the first result display unit 306a is not displaying the fluctuation display is based on the winning probability in a situation where the first result display unit 306a is displaying the fluctuation display. May also be lower. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the execution of the second opening / closing execution mode in a situation where the first result display unit 306a is not in the off state and the fluctuation display is being performed, and it is possible to suppress the grant of an unintended privilege.

<Third embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration related to the lower working port 304 is different from that of the second embodiment. The different points will be described below.

  The gaming board 400 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a front view of the game board 400.

  In the gaming area of the gaming board 400 of the present embodiment, an upper operation port 401 and a lower operation port 402 are provided, and a through gate 403 is provided. In addition, the decorative member 65 is provided with a display unit 404 for the accessory corresponding to the through gate 403, and the lower operating port 402 is provided with an electric accessory 402 a.

  When the game ball passes through the through gate 403, a support lottery is performed, and a variation display of a normal symbol is performed on the accessory display unit 404. Then, when the lottery result of the support lottery is a winning result, a stop result corresponding to the winning result is displayed on the accessory display unit 404, and then the electric accessory 402a is supported (opening / closing operation).

  In the situation where the electric accessory 402a is in the closed state, it is not possible to win a game ball in the lower operating port 304, while in the situation where the electric accessory 402a is in the open state, it is permissible to win a game ball in the lower operating port 304. It is configured to be. Specifically, when the electric accessory 402a is in the closed state, the distance between the tip of the electric accessory 402a and the case body forming the upper working port 303 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. A relative positional relationship between the operation ports 401 and 402 is set. Then, when the electric accessory 402a is in the open state, the electric accessory 402a is arranged such that the distance between the tip of the electric accessory 402a and the case body forming the upper working port 303 is larger than the diameter of the game ball. Is set. As a result, when the electric accessory 402a is changed from the closed state to the open state, a state in which a prize of a game ball to the lower operation port 304 is allowed is achieved.

  According to such a configuration, the frequency of winning in the lower operating port 304 differs depending on whether or not the support of the electric accessory 402a has occurred in a situation where the first result display unit 306a is displaying the departure variation. The winning frequency affects the number of executions of the second opening / closing execution mode, and thus affects the privilege of the player. For this reason, in the second opening / closing execution mode, the degree of attention to the through gate 403, the electric accessory 402a, and the accessory display unit 404 can be increased.

  It should be noted that a configuration in which a winning of a game ball to the lower operating port 304 may be allowed in a state where the electric auditors 402a is in a closed state may be adopted. In short, it is sufficient that the frequency of winning in the lower operating port 304 when the electric accessory 402a is open is higher than that when the electric accessory 402a is closed.

  Further, the center frame 305a of the variable display unit 305 is provided with a third holding lamp section 405 indicating a winning history of the through gate 403. The number of game balls that have won the through gate 403 is held up to a maximum of four, and the number of held balls is displayed by turning on the third holding lamp unit 405.

<About the configuration of various counters>
Next, various counters according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the present embodiment, unlike the second embodiment, an electric-power counter C21 is provided as a counter for performing a support lottery based on winning in the through gate 403, and an electric-power counter for storing the electric-power counter C21 is provided. A role holding area 411 is provided. The electric part counter C21 and the electric part holding area 411 have the same configuration as the first electric part counter C1 and the first electric part holding area 231 of the first embodiment, and thus a detailed description is omitted.

  Here, in the present embodiment, a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the modes of support by the electric accessory 402a are different from each other. In detail, in the support mode, when compared in a situation where the launch of the game ball is continued in the same manner with respect to the game area, the electric accessory 402a of the lower working port 402 is opened per unit time. The low-frequency support mode (or the low-frequency guide state) and the high-frequency support mode (or the high-frequency guide state) are set so that the frequency of the high-frequency support becomes relatively high and low.

  The low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode differ in the winning probability of the support lottery using the electric hand counter C21. Specifically, the winning probability of the support lottery in the low frequency support mode is smaller than that in the high frequency support mode.

  Further, in the high frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 402a is opened when the support is won is set more than in the low frequency support mode, and one open time is set longer. In this case, in a case where the support lottery result is a winning result in the high-frequency support mode and the open state of the electric accessory 402a occurs a plurality of times, a period from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state. The closing time is set shorter than one opening time.

  Further, in the high frequency support mode, the support interval from the time when a predetermined support is performed to the time when the next support is performed is set to be shorter than in the low frequency support mode. Specifically, in the high frequency support mode, the fluctuation display time of the ordinary symbol performed on the accessory display unit 404 is set shorter than in the low frequency support mode.

  From the above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability that a winning operation will occur in the lower operation port 402 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. Then, when a winning in the lower operating port 402 occurs, the mode can shift to the second opening / closing execution mode, and therefore, in the high frequency support mode, a privilege is easily given to the player.

<Process for electrical support>
The electronic support process according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. In the normal process (FIG. 14), the process for supporting the electric role is independent from the process related to the variable display of the specific symbol in the both result display units 306a and 306b based on the winning of the game ball to both the operating ports 401 and 402. Executed. In the electric role support processing, the display of the normal symbol on the accessory display unit 404 is changed and the opening and closing operation of the electric character 402a is controlled.

  First, in step S2001, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 402a is being supported. If the electric accessory 402a is not being supported, the process advances to step S2002 to determine whether or not the ordinary symbol is being displayed on the accessory display unit 404 in a variable manner.

  If the normal symbol is not being displayed in a fluctuating manner, the process proceeds to step S2003, and it is determined whether or not the hold information (electric counter C21) which is not yet subjected to the lottery of the support lottery exists in the electric hand hold area 411.

  If there is no pending information that is not yet a target of the support lottery, the main power support process is terminated as it is. If the pending information exists, the process proceeds to step S2004 to display the first result. It is determined whether or not the unit 306a is displaying a deviating change.

  If the first result display unit 306a is not in the off-state variation display, the process proceeds to step S2005, in which a normal symbol variation start process corresponding to the low-frequency support mode is executed, and the present electrical role support process ends. Specifically, a support lottery is performed using the hold information, and a process of determining the variable display time of the normal symbol is executed. Then, the normal symbol change display is started.

  On the other hand, if the first result display unit 306a is in the off-variation display mode, the process proceeds to step S2006, in which the normal symbol variation start process corresponding to the high-frequency support mode is executed, and the electronic support support process ends. I do. Specifically, the support lottery is performed so that the winning probability is higher than that of the low frequency support mode, and the variable display time shorter than the variable display time of the low frequency support mode is determined. Then, the normal symbol change display is started. As a result, the winning probability of the support lottery is higher in the high frequency support mode than in the low frequency support mode, and the variable symbol display time is usually shorter.

  If the normal symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner (step S2002: YES), a fluctuating process is executed in step S2007. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the variable display time has elapsed. If it is determined that the variable display time has elapsed, a process of displaying a stop result corresponding to the support lottery result is executed. Then, when the support lottery result is a winning result, a flag for specifying that support is being performed is set.

  If the support is being performed, an affirmative determination is made in step S2001, and the process proceeds to step S2008. In step S2008, it is determined whether or not the first result display unit 306a is displaying a deviating variation.

  If the first result display unit 306a is not displaying the deviating change, in step S2009, the opening / closing process of the electric accessory 402a corresponding to the low-frequency support mode is executed, and the electric-power-supporting process ends. Specifically, a process for opening the electric accessory 402a only once for 0.2 seconds is executed.

  On the other hand, when the first result display unit 306a is in the off-variation display, in step S2010, the process of opening and closing the electric accessory 402a corresponding to the high-frequency support mode is performed, and finish. Specifically, an operation of opening the electric accessory 402a for a longer time (for example, 0.4 sec) than the opening time in the low frequency support mode is set as a unit operation, and a predetermined interval time (for example, 0.2 sec) is used. To perform the unit operation a plurality of times (for example, three times).

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the high frequency support mode is set in the situation where the deviation fluctuation display is being performed on the first result display unit 306a, and the deviation fluctuation display is displayed on the first result display unit 306a. The low-frequency support mode is used in a situation in which the variable display is not performed on the first result display unit 306a and a case in which the winning variable display is performed in the first result display unit 306a. It was set. This makes it difficult for the lower operating port 304 to win a prize in a situation where the deviation change display is not being performed on the first result display unit 306a, so that the second opening / closing execution mode is less likely to be executed in this situation. On the other hand, in the situation where the departure variation display is being performed on the first result display unit 306a, winning in the lower operating port 304 is likely to occur, so that the execution frequency of the second opening / closing execution mode can be increased.

  In the present embodiment, the winning probability of the support lottery in the high frequency support mode is set higher than that in the low frequency support mode, but the present invention is not limited to this. Good. In addition, in a configuration in which multiple types of variable display time of a normal symbol are prepared, a setting is made such that a shorter variable display time is easier to select or an average variable display time is shorter in the high frequency support mode than in the low frequency support mode. It may be. In short, the winning probability of the support lottery, the variable display time of the ordinary symbol, and the opening / closing operation of the electric accessory 402a are set such that the winning frequency of the lower working port 402 is higher in the high frequency support mode than in the low frequency support mode. At least one of the conditions may be changed.

  In the present embodiment, the variable display time of the second result display unit 306b may be set shorter than the winning variable display time of the first result display unit 306a. Even in this case, if the first result display unit 306a is not displaying the fluctuation display, the winning of the game ball to the lower operating port 402 is regulated by the electric accessory 402a. Is less likely to occur.

  Further, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the winning of a game ball to the upper operating port 401 and the support of the electric accessory 402a are synchronized. Specifically, when a winning in the upper operating port 401 occurs in a situation where the winning variation of the ordinary symbol is being displayed on the accessory display unit 404, the winning variation of the ordinary symbol is immediately displayed based on the winning. It is configured to end and start supporting the electric accessory 402a. Accordingly, the frequency of winning in the lower operating port 402 after the winning in the upper operating port 401 is likely to increase.

<Other embodiments>
It is to be noted that the present invention is not limited to the description of the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. Incidentally, the configuration of the following another embodiment may be individually applied to the configuration of the above embodiment, or may be applied in combination.

  (1) In the first embodiment, after the deviation display of the first unit area 71, the deviation result is displayed for a predetermined time. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the hold information is stored in the one-electric-power holding area 231, the next variable display based on the hold information may be immediately started. In this case, even if the next variation display is a winning variation display, the winning variation display of the second unit area 72 or the third unit area 73 may be ended during the winning variation display. That is, it can be said that the state is also advantageous during the next fluctuation display after the deviation fluctuation display. If the next variable display is the winning variable display, the variable display of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 ends based on the end of the winning variable display, and the advantageous state ends. I do.

  According to the above configuration, the out-of-change display (out-of-play game time) and the next change display (next game time) are digested as a series of advantageous states. For example, in the case where the deviation display is continuously performed, the deviation display and the winning display after the deviation display are performed as a series of advantageous states. As a result, the display before and after the fluctuation can be closely associated with each other, and it is not necessary to secure the display time of the deviation result, so that the game can proceed smoothly.

  In this case, in the display of the remaining advantageous time, for example, the remaining time of the deviation change display is displayed based on the start of the deviation change display. Then, the counting of the deviating fluctuation display time is performed, and when the counting ends (when the remaining time becomes “0”), it is determined whether or not the pending command information exists. If the pending command information does not exist, the ending is executed. If the pending command information exists, the process waits for the reception of the variable command. Based on the receipt of the fluctuation command, the remaining advantageous time is reset and the counting is restarted. The remaining advantageous time is set to 0.5 sec when a winning fluctuation command is received, and is set to a deviation fluctuation display time when a deviation fluctuation command is received. As a result, it is possible to make the remaining advantageous time appear to be extended, so that the degree of attention to the game can be further improved.

  In the above configuration, the ending for 2 seconds is executed after the end of the winning game time after the off game time. Then, when the pending command information is set in the pending command information storage area 261, after the end of the ending, a time-saving pending advance effect is set for the pending command information. Thereby, during the opening of the first motor-driven accessory 41a based on the winning variation display that has triggered the end of the advantageous state, it is possible to perform an ending and a hold announcement effect relating to the next game time.

  The same applies to the second and third embodiments.

  (2) In the first embodiment, the fluctuation type counter CS at that time was not acquired based on the winning in the first through gate 51. However, the present invention is not limited to this. May be configured to acquire the variation type counter CS. In this case, the variation type counter CS is stored together with the first electric win counter C1 in the first electric win holding area 231, and the first electric win counter C1 acquired this time is deviated in the confirmation processing for the advance notice. If the value corresponds to the value, a configuration may be employed in which the acquired variation type counter CS is used to determine the out-of-range variation display time. In this case, a departure hold command including the departure fluctuation display time is transmitted to the sound emission control device 102. As a result, in the sound emission control device 102, based on the reception of the hold command, the first electric hand counter C1 corresponding to the departure is acquired, and the departure change display time (based on the first electric part counter C1) Out-of-game time).

  In such a configuration, for example, when the first electric win counter C1 that is the same as the outlier is continuously obtained, both may be treated as one game time in a pseudo manner. Specifically, for example, at a timing before the timing at which the predetermined off-play game is started, the hold information (the first electric win counter C1) related to the next play is acquired, and the hold information is If the value is the same as the outlier, the next outlier is started immediately after the end of the predetermined outlier.

  In this case, the sound emission control device 102 determines whether or not the next game time is a miss game time in the process related to the start of the effect in the advantageous state. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the pending command information relating to the next game time has been acquired and whether the pending command information corresponds to the disconnection. And when it is confirmed that the next game time is a miss game time, the game time of the next game time is grasped, and the game time of the current game time and the next game time. Is displayed on the display screen G, and the countdown is started. Thereby, it can be seen that one game round having a long advantageous time is performed in a pseudo manner.

  Further, in a situation where a predetermined out-of-game time is being performed, if the first electric win counter C1 relating to the next game time and having the same value as the out-of-range value is obtained, After the end of the off-going game, the next off-going game is started immediately. Then, in the sound emission control device 102, in the hold command corresponding process, while determining whether the hold command received this time is related to the next game time and the next game time is out of play time, It is determined whether or not the effect during the advantageous state is being executed. If the above two determinations are affirmed, the countdown is performed by adding the out-of-play game time corresponding to the currently acquired suspension command to the current remaining advantageous time. As a result, it is possible to make it appear that the advantageous time has increased halfway, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game in the advantageous state.

  The same applies to the second and third embodiments.

  (3) In the first embodiment, the two second through gates 52 and the third through gate 53 are provided, and the second electric winning opening 42 and the second electric accessory 42a and the third electric Although the winning combination opening 43 and the third electric combination 43a are provided, the invention is not limited to this, and one through gate, an electric combination winning opening and an electric combination may be provided. However, from the viewpoint of increasing the degree of attention to the manner in which the game balls flow down, it is preferable to provide two configurations for each.

  Further, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of winning combinations for electric winning are associated with one through gate. In this case, if the support lottery result based on the winning of one through gate is a winning result, one of the plurality of winning combinations of electric winnings is selected by an internal drawing and the selected electing winnings are selected. It is good also as a structure which opens and closes the electric accessory provided in the winning opening.

  In this case, it is not possible to visually determine which opening / closing operation of the electric accessory is performed before the opening / closing operation of the electric accessory, so that attention can be given to the operation mode of the electric accessory. . As a result, it is possible to further increase the degree of attention to the notification by the electric accessory.

  (4) In the above-described first embodiment, the respective electric winning holes 41 to 43 are provided. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, only one electric winning hole and an electric accessory may be provided. In this case, based on the support lottery triggered by a prize to the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53, rather than the opening / closing operation of the electric accessory based on the support lottery triggered by a prize to the first through gate 51. It is preferable to set the opening / closing operation mode of the electric accessory such that the opening and closing operation of the electric accessory has a higher degree of expectation that the game ball enters. Thereby, the number of game balls paid out to the player in the advantageous state can be increased.

  (5) In the first embodiment, the minimum change display time of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 is set to be longer than the winning change display time of the first unit area 71. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The minimum fluctuation display time of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 may be set to be the same as the winning fluctuation display time of the first unit area 71. Even in this case, in the same process of the normal process, the first general-purpose variation start process is executed before the second general-purpose variation start process and the third general-purpose variation start process, and the first unit area 71 Is performed prior to the process related to the end of the variable display of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73, so that the change display of the ordinary symbol in the first unit area 71 ends first. Will be done.

  Further, the distance between the first through gate 51, the second through gate 52, and the third through gate 53 is not limited to the configuration in which the processing order is set as described above, and may be such that the distance at which the game ball falls is 4 msec or more. It may be configured to be set.

  (6) In the first embodiment, the configuration is such that the support lottery result based on winning in the first through gate 51 is in an advantageous state when the result is out of order. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the result of the support lottery based on the winning of the prize is a winning result, the player may be in an advantageous state. For example, the winning variable display time of the first unit area 71 is set longer than the variable display time of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73, and the variable display time of the first unit area 71 is changed to the second unit area 72. And the variable display time of the third unit area 73 is set to be shorter. Then, the variable display of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 is reset based on the end of the winning variable display or the deviation variable display in the first unit area 71. In this case, a state in which the first unit area 71 is displaying the winning variation (during a winning game) is in an advantageous state for the player.

  The same applies to the second and third embodiments.

  (7) In the first embodiment described above, when the support of the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a is started during the deviation change display of the first unit area 71, the deviation fluctuation of the first unit area 71 is started. Although the configuration is such that the counting of the display time is temporarily stopped, the present invention is not limited to this. In this case, since the advantageous time can be treated as a fixed time, the management of the game can be facilitated and the processing configuration can be simplified.

  The same applies to the second and third embodiments.

  (8) In the first embodiment, the variable display of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 is reset based on the end of the winning game round. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Is also good. In this case, if the support mode (opening / closing operation mode) of the second electric accessory 42a and the third electric accessory 43a during the winning game is set so as to be more disadvantageous for the player than that during the off-game. Good. Thereby, even if the support of the second electric auditors goods 42a and the third electric auditors goods 43a is started during the winning game round due to the non-reset, the privilege given to the player is reduced. It can be reduced and an advantageous state can be secured.

  The same applies to the second and third embodiments.

  (9) In the first embodiment, the other variable display may be reset based on the end of one winning variable display among the variable displays of the unit areas 71 to 73. In this case, a lottery is separately performed to determine whether or not to shift to the advantageous state, and when the state shifts to the advantageous state, the variable display time of the first unit area 71 is changed to the second unit area 72 and the predetermined multiple game times. It is preferable that the variable display time is set to be longer than the variable display time of the third unit area 73. As a result, the game is in an advantageous state until the plurality of game times are exhausted.

  (10) In each of the above embodiments, the configuration is such that the holding advance notice effect and the time reduction advance notice effect are executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, only the hold advance effect may be executed. However, if attention is paid to increasing the execution frequency of the effect, a configuration in which both the hold announcement effect and the time reduction advance announcement effect are executed is more preferable.

  (11) In each of the above-described embodiments, the normal hold advance notice effect (and the time reduction normal hold advance notice effect) is performed over the opening or first opening / closing execution mode of the first electric auditors accessory 41a and the next game time. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the configuration may be performed only during the opening or the first opening / closing execution mode of the first electric accessory 41a. In this case, since there is little difference in the production time between the normal reservation advance production and the advantageous suspension advance production, the result of the next game time is specified at a timing before the timing at which the stop result is displayed on the display screen G. Can be avoided.

  In addition, if attention is paid to diversification of the normal reservation announcement effect, it is more preferable that the execution is performed even during the next game.

  (12) In each of the above-described embodiments, the advantageous hold announcement effect is performed only during the opening or the first opening / closing execution mode of the first electric auditors product 41a. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. It is good also as a structure performed over an opening or 1st opening / closing execution mode, and the subsequent departure game time. In this case, after the start of the off-game, the winning variation display time is secured as the production time of the advantageous hold announcement effect. Then, it may be configured to execute the effect during the advantageous state based on the fact that the advantageous suspension notice effect has ended.

  (13) In each of the above-described embodiments, an effect related to the game time (holding notice effect) is executed by using the time of the support of the first electric accessory 41a on the front side and the time when the game time is performed with respect to the game time. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the effect related to the game time may be executed using the support of the first electric auditors product 41a on the rear side of the game time. In other words, the configuration may be such that the effect related to the winning game time is executed over the winning game time and the support of the first electric auditors 41a based on the winning game time. In this case, the stop result of the first unit area 71 and the opening / closing operation mode of the first electric accessory 41a are given to the player so that the result of the current game round is not grasped at a timing before the end timing of the effect. It should be difficult to understand.

  (14) In each of the above embodiments, the time between the winning game time and the next game time (the support time of the first electric accessory 41a in the first embodiment, the first opening / closing execution in the second and third embodiments) The mode time) is a fixed time, but is not limited to this, and may be set as a variable time. Specifically, for example, in the first embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which a prize in the first electric win prize port 41 is permitted. As a result, the support time varies according to the winning mode of the first electric winning opening 41.

  In such a configuration, it is preferable that the production mode of the hold notice effect is changed according to the time between the winning game time and the next game time. Specifically, in the normal reservation notice effect and the time reduction normal reservation notice effect, it is preferable to temporarily display the combination of the missing decorative symbols based on the start of the next game round.

  In the advantageous reservation announcement effect and the time reduction advantageous reservation announcement effect, the combination of the jackpot decoration symbols may be stopped and displayed based on the start of the next game round.

  (15) In the above embodiments, the remaining advantageous time is displayed on the display screen G. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display may not be displayed. In this case, the player finishes the game in the advantageous state while predicting when the advantageous state ends.

  (16) In each of the embodiments described above, the advantageous time (the variation display time in which the first unit area 71 is deviated) is varied, but the advantage may not be varied. Thereby, it is possible to facilitate the management of the game and to simplify the processing configuration. However, if attention is paid to increasing the degree of attention to the game, the configuration in which the variation is performed is superior.

  (17) In the first embodiment, the opening / closing mode is set to be the same for the second electric accessory 42a and the third electric accessory 43a. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the second electric accessory 42a and the third The opening / closing mode may be set differently from the electric accessory 43a. In this case, it is preferable to set the opening / closing state of the two so that the degree of expectation of the game ball entering is different. Thereby, the player pays attention to which of the second through gate 52 and the third through gate 53 the game ball that has passed through the first through gate 51 passes, so that the degree of attention to the game is further increased. A further improvement can be achieved.

  Further, the winning probability of the support lottery based on the winning in the second through gate 52 and the winning probability of the supporting lottery based on the winning in the third through gate 53 may be different from each other. Even in this case, depending on whether the game ball passing through the first through gate 51 passes through the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53, the privilege given to the player is different. Is generated, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the downflow mode of the game ball.

  (18) In each of the above embodiments, when the deviation change display of the first unit area 71 or the first result display unit 306a ends, the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 or the second result display unit Although the variable display of 306b is configured to be continued, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be used in which resetting is performed. In this case, since the fluctuation range of the advantageous time can be reduced, the management of the game can be easily performed, and the processing related to the end of the advantageous state can be simplified.

  (19) In the first embodiment, “0” is displayed as the remaining advantageous time count display based on the end of the deviation change display of the first unit area 71. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, the display of the count of the remaining advantageous time may be continued until the advantageous state ends. Specifically, at the end timing of the deviation variation display (for example, after the display of the deviation result is performed in the first unit area 71), whether the winning variation display is being performed in the second unit area 72 or the third unit area 73? Determine whether or not. When the winning fluctuation display is being performed, the remaining fluctuation display time is grasped based on the second timer counter T2 or the third timer counter T3. If the winning change display is being performed, the longer remaining change display time is grasped. Then, a command including the remaining fluctuation display time information is transmitted to the display control device 212 via the audio light emission control device 102. The display control device 212 displays the remaining fluctuation display time based on receiving the command.

  Further, the end condition of the opening / closing operation may be displayed based on the lapse of the remaining fluctuation display time. Specifically, 6 seconds are displayed as the upper limit opening time, and 10 pieces are displayed as the upper limit number. Then, the upper limit opening time and the upper limit number are counted. Thus, the timing at which the advantageous state ends can be easily grasped.

  (20) According to the first embodiment, when the holding information is not acquired in the first electric winning holding area 231, both the variable display of the first unit area 71 and the opening / closing operation of the first electric accessory 41 a are performed. When the first electric combination counter C1 is acquired in a situation where the execution is not performed, the deviation change display is immediately performed, but is not limited thereto, and the predetermined change is performed between the acquisition timing and the start timing of the deviation change display. A configuration may be adopted in which a time is provided and the opening effect is executed at the predetermined time.

  (21) In the first embodiment, the lottery is performed based on the winning in the first through gate 51, whether or not to generate the support of the first motor-driven accessory 41a. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to emit a specific lamp provided in the game area. That is, the target of the lottery based on the winning in the first through gate 51 is arbitrary.

  Further, a configuration in which the first electric accessory 41a is not provided may be adopted. In this case, when the lottery result based on the winning in the first through gate 51 is the winning result, the winning result is displayed for a predetermined time, and during the displaying of the winning result, the second unit area 72 and the second unit area 72 are displayed. The variable display of the third unit area 73 is prevented from being started. Thereby, a game similar to that of the first embodiment can be played.

  (22) In the first embodiment, an event that a game ball wins the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53 without passing through the first through gate 51 is unlikely to occur. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a configuration in which the above-described event easily occurs may be adopted. In this case, the positional relationship between the through gates 51 to 53 and the position of the nail for guiding the game ball are set so that the winning frequency to each of the through gates 51 to 53 does not change regardless of the mode of launch of the game ball. Good. Thereby, it is possible to suppress an aiming action such that a prize in the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53 is generated in preference to a prize in the first through gate 51, and the fairness of the game is secured. can do.

  (23) In the first embodiment, counting the variable display time in both the winning variable display and the off-variable display of the first unit area 71 based on the start of the support of the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a. Is temporarily stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the pause may be performed only in the case of the out-of-change display, and the configuration may not be stopped in the case of the winning change display. In this case, based on the end of the winning variation display (the start of the support of the first electric accessory 41a), the support of the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a may be ended.

  The same applies to the second and third embodiments.

  (24) In each of the above embodiments, the high probability mode and the low probability mode in which the winning probability of the support lottery using the first electric win counter C1 or the success / failure determination using the jackpot random number counter C11 is relatively high or low are set. It is good also as a structure which performs. In this case, the low-probability mode is more advantageous for the player because the deviation variation display is more easily performed in the first unit area 71 or the first result display unit 306a.

  (25) In the first embodiment, the opening time of the first electric accessory 41a may be changed. In this case, when the first electric accessory 41a is opened for a long time, the reach display described in the second embodiment may be performed.

  In addition, the opening and closing operation of the first electric accessory 41a may be configured such that the first electric accessory 41a is opened twice with an interval time in which the first electric accessory 41a is closed, and the interval time may be varied. This makes it possible to secure a time equal to or longer than the upper limit opening time as an effect time of the hold notice effect.

  (26) In each of the above embodiments, the advantageous time is displayed in the countdown format. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the advantageous time may be displayed in the countup format. In this case, it is preferable to display the current deviation change display time separately so as to grasp the remaining advantageous time.

  (27) In the first embodiment, based on the end of the winning variable display of the second unit area 72 or the third unit area 73, the counting of the variable display time in the variable display of another unit area is temporarily stopped. Although the above-described counting is restarted based on the end of the support based on the winning fluctuation display, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured not to restart. In this case, for example, the configuration may be such that the variable display time is reset based on the end of the support, or the configuration may be such that the support related to the variable display that has been temporarily suspended immediately after the end of the support is started. However, if attention is paid to the diversity of the game, a configuration in which the game is temporarily stopped is preferable.

  (28) In each of the above embodiments, the processing related to the setting of the hold command (the destination specifying processing) is immediately executed based on the acquisition of the hold information. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The processing related to the setting of the hold command may be executed based on the start of the support or the first opening / closing execution mode. Even in this case, the hold notice effect can be executed. However, if attention is paid to the fact that the time-saving on-hold announcement effect can be executed, it is better to perform the operation immediately based on the acquisition of the on-hold information.

  (29) In each of the above embodiments, each time the hold information is acquired, a hold command based on the hold information is transmitted to the sound light emission control device 102, and the sound light emission control device 102 stores the hold command each time. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which only a hold command based on the hold information related to the next game round is transmitted. Even in this case, various pending announcement effects can be executed, and the storage capacity of the RAM 244 can be reduced. However, in view of the complexity of the processing, a configuration in which the information is stored each time is better.

  (30) In the first embodiment, if one of the supports of the second electric accessory 42a and the third electric accessory 43a is performed during the advantageous state, the other support is not performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration in which both are supported may be adopted. Thereby, the privilege given to a player can be increased.

  In addition, as a specific configuration, for example, in the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73, based on the end of the winning variable display of one unit area, the other variable display is not temporarily stopped.

  (31) In the first embodiment, the support lottery is performed based on the game ball passing through the first through gate 51 or the second through gate 52. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Any configuration may be used as long as the operation (specific control) is performed. For example, based on the passing of a game ball through the first through gate 51 or the second through gate 52, the payout of the game ball, for example, may be made as the same type of privilege.

  (32) In the first embodiment, based on the completion of the winning variable display of the first unit area 71, the variable display of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 and the trigger of the variable display are triggered. Although the configuration is such that the support lottery result is reset, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, only the support lottery result may be reset. In this case, the variable display is ended without displaying the stop result after the variable display time has elapsed.

  Further, based on the end of the winning variation display of the first unit area 71, a part or all of the hold information stored in the second and third electric power holding areas 232 and 233 is deleted. It may be configured.

  (33) In the first embodiment, the winning change display time of the first unit area 71 is a predetermined fixed time. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the change time may be changed. In this case, it is preferable that the longest time of the winning fluctuation display time is set shorter than the shortest fluctuation display time of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73. Thereby, the gaming ability described in each of the above embodiments can be realized.

  In addition, for example, the winning fluctuation display time of the first unit area 71 (or the average time when the fluctuation display time fluctuates) is calculated from the average time of the fluctuation display time of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73. May be set to be short.

  Further, in the first embodiment, the variation display time of the first unit area 71 is varied. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be set to a predetermined fixed time. In this case, the fixed time may be set so that the variable display in the second unit area 72 or the third unit area 73 can be performed a plurality of times. However, if attention is paid to the degree of attention to the advantageous time and the variety of the game, a configuration in which the variation display time is changed is more preferable.

  Further, the variable display time of the second unit area 72 and the third unit area 73 may be set to a predetermined fixed time instead of the variable configuration. In this case, each variable display time may be set so that the fixed time is longer than the winning variable display time of the first unit area 71 and shorter than the departure variable display time of the first unit area 71.

  In short, when the winning variation display is performed in the first unit area 71, the winning variation display is likely to end earlier than the variation display in the other unit areas 72, 73, while the first variation display is performed in the first unit area 71. If the variable display time is set so that the variable display can be performed a plurality of times in the second unit region 72 or the third unit region 73 during the variable display, the variable display time is set. Good.

  The same applies to the second and third embodiments.

  (34) In each of the above embodiments, the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 42a is displayed during the deviation variation display of the first unit area 71 (in the second embodiment, during the deviation variation display of the first result display unit 306a). Although the support of the electric accessory 43a (the second opening / closing execution mode in the second embodiment) can be performed a plurality of times, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to end once. In this case, the game may be appropriately managed by adjusting the expectation of the game ball given based on one support or the winning probability of the support lottery (in the second embodiment, the jackpot lottery).

  (35) Other types of pachinko machines, such as pachinko machines, which are different from the above embodiments, for example, a pachinko machine in which a right is generated when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device and a jackpot, and a pachinko machine with other accessories The present invention can also be applied to gaming machines such as an arrangement ball machine and a sparrow ball.

  In addition, a game machine that is not a ball-and-ball type, for example, includes a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of symbols are provided in a circumferential direction, starts rotation of the reels by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. If a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols has been established on an effective line that can be visually recognized from the display unit after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed, a bonus such as a medal payout is provided to the player. A part of the present invention can be applied to a slot machine.

  Furthermore, the gaming machine body supported to be openable and closable on the outer frame is provided with a storage unit and a capture device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are captured by the capture device. Thus, a part of the present invention can be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, in which the rotation of a reel is started.

<About the inventions extracted from the above embodiment>
Hereinafter, the features of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiment will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in the above-described embodiment is appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses or the like.

<Feature A group>
Feature A1. Based on the first lottery opportunity (winning of the first through gate 51 in the first embodiment, winning of the upper operating ports 303 and 401 in the second and third embodiments), the first specific control (first embodiment) 1st lottery means (the process of step S603 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to execute the support of the first electric accessory 41a in the first embodiment and the first opening / closing execution mode in the second and third embodiments. Function for executing the processing of step S1703 of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments),
A second lottery opportunity different from the first lottery opportunity (a prize in the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53 in the first embodiment, a prize in the lower operating ports 304 and 402 in the second and third embodiments) ) Based on the second specific control (the support of the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a in the first embodiment, the second opening / closing in the second and third embodiments) A second lottery means (a function of executing the processing of step S1003 or step S1209 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, a step S1803 of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to execute the execution mode. Function to perform processing),
With
The second specifying control includes, when a lottery result obtained by the second lottery means is a winning result corresponding to executing the second specifying control, a predetermined period after the lottery is performed by the second lottery means ( This is performed when the winning variation display time of the second unit area 72 or the third unit area 73 in the first embodiment, the winning variation display time of the second result display unit 306b in the second and third embodiments has elapsed. And
Based on the fact that the lottery result by the first lottery means is the winning result, invalidation means (variation reset processing of the MPU 202 which invalidates at least one of the second lottery opportunity and the lottery result by the second lottery means) (A function to execute).

  According to the feature A1, the lottery by the first lottery means and the lottery by the second lottery means are respectively executed independently. This allows the player to simultaneously confirm the state of the lottery by the two lottery means.

  In such a configuration, based on the fact that the lottery result by the first lottery means is a winning result, at least one of the second lottery opportunity and the lottery result by the second lottery means is invalidated. Accordingly, it is possible to provide a novel game in which the lottery results of the first lottery means can be prioritized while the two lottery means are independently performed, and the lottery mode of these lottery means is related. It becomes possible. Therefore, interest can be improved.

Feature A2. Based on the lottery by the first lottery means, a symbol change display is started on the first display unit (the first unit area 71 in the first embodiment, the first result display unit 306a in the second and third embodiments). A first display control means for displaying a stop result corresponding to the lottery result of the first lottery means (the function of executing the processing of steps S505 to S517 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, the second display control means in the second and third embodiments) A function of controlling display of the first result display unit 306a of the MPU 202);
On the basis of the lottery by the second lottery means, a second display section different from the first display section (the second unit area 72 or the third unit area 73 in the first embodiment, the second display area in the second and third embodiments) (2) second display control means (to start the symbol change display on the second result display unit 306b) and display a stop result corresponding to the lottery result of the second lottery means (steps S904 to S914 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment or A function of executing the processing of steps S1204 to S1214, a function of performing display control of the second result display unit 306b of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments), and
With
Each of the display control means can perform the change display of the symbol on the other display unit during the change display of the symbol on one of the display units,
The invalidation unit is configured to determine whether the specific stop result corresponding to the execution of the first specific control is displayed on the first display unit in a situation where the symbol change display is being performed on the second display unit. The gaming machine according to Feature A1, wherein the change display of the symbol performed on the second display unit and a lottery result that triggered the change display are invalidated.

  According to the feature A2, the change display of the symbol is performed independently on the first display unit and the second display unit. Then, when the specific stop result is displayed on the first display unit or the second display unit, the first specific control or the second specific control is performed. Thereby, an event in which the first specific control or the second specific control is performed may occur during the change display of the symbol on one of the display units, so that it is possible to provide a novel game, and to improve the interest more appropriately. Can be planned.

  In such a configuration, when the specific stop result corresponding to the execution of the first specific control is displayed on the first display unit, the change display of the symbol performed on the second display unit and the trigger of the change display are triggered. The lottery result is invalidated. Thus, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the second specific control is not executed even though the specific stop result is displayed on the second display unit. Therefore, it is possible to reduce a sense of incongruity that can be caused by invalidating the lottery result by the second lottery means.

Feature A3. The first display control unit is a first period determination unit that determines a first change display period that is a period of the change display of the symbol on the first display unit (the processing of steps S606 and 608 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment). And the function of executing the processes of steps S1706 and S1709 of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments), and when the symbol change display is performed on the first display unit, the first period determination is performed. In the first change display period determined by the means, the change display of the symbol is performed in a predetermined change display mode,
The second display control unit is configured to determine a second change display period that is a period of the symbol change display on the second display unit (the processing of steps S606 and 608 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment). And the function of executing the processing of steps S1806, 1808, and 1809 of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments), and when the symbol change display is performed on the second display unit, the second In the second change display period determined by the period determination means, a change display of the symbol is performed in a predetermined change display mode,
When the lottery result by the first lottery means is the winning result, the first change display period is set to be shorter than the second change display period,
When the lottery result by the first lottery means is a non-winning result that does not correspond to the execution of the first specific control, the first change display period is set to be easily longer than the second change display period. The gaming machine according to feature A2, characterized in that:

  According to the feature A3, when the lottery result by the first lottery means is a winning result, the symbol change display on the first display unit ends at a timing before the symbol change display end timing on the second display unit. Easy to do. Thereby, the first specific control can be executed with higher priority than the second specific control.

  On the other hand, when the lottery result by the first lottery means is a non-winning result, the change display of the symbols on the second display unit is likely to end at a timing before the end timing of the change display of the symbols on the first display unit. Thus, the second specific control can be executed with higher priority than the first specific control. Therefore, the specific control to be executed can be made different depending on the first change display period. Therefore, the change display of the symbol on the first display unit can be closely associated with the specific control.

Feature A4. Launching means (playing ball launching mechanism 27) for launching a playing ball toward a game area where the playing ball flows down;
A first ball entry portion (first through gate 51 in the first embodiment, upper working ports 303 and 401 in the second and third embodiments) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball, and a second ball entry portion. A spherical portion (the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53 in the first embodiment, the lower working ports 304 and 402 in the second and third embodiments),
With
The first lottery opportunity is that a game ball enters the first entry section,
The second lottery opportunity is that a game ball enters the second entry section,
The feature A2 or a feature that is configured so that a ball can enter the first ball entry portion when a launch operation is performed with the aim of entering the second ball entry portion. The gaming machine according to Feature A3.

  According to the feature A4, when aiming at the ball entry into the second ball entry section, the ball entry into the first ball entry section can occur naturally. Thus, by adjusting the launch mode of the game ball, it is possible to suppress the act of intentionally causing the second ball-entering section to enter the ball. Therefore, the change display of the symbol on the second display unit is preferentially performed over the display change of the symbol on the first display unit, and the act of intentionally executing the second specific control can be suppressed. It is possible to prevent a game different from the game being played.

Feature A5. The first ball entry part and the second ball entry part are a first passage part (first through gate 51) and a second passage part (second through gate 52 or third through gate 53) through which a game ball can pass. And
The relative positional relationship between the first passing portion and the second passing portion is set such that the game ball that has passed through the first passing portion can pass through the second passing portion,
A game ball such that a frequency at which a game ball passes through the second passage portion without passing through the first passage portion is lower than a frequency at which the game ball passes through the first passage portion and passes through the second passage portion. The gaming machine according to feature A4, further comprising a flow-down mode restricting means (restriction nail 64b) for restricting the flow-down mode.

  According to the feature A5, the game ball easily passes through the second passing portion after passing through the first passing portion. Thereby, after the lottery is performed by the first lottery means, the lottery is easily performed by the second lottery means. Therefore, the start timing of the symbol change display on the first display unit is likely to be earlier than the start timing of the symbol change display on the second display unit. Therefore, the frequency at which the change display of the symbol on the first display unit ends during the change display of the symbol on the second display unit can be further increased.

Feature A6. The first display control means includes:
Period determining means for determining a change display period that is a period of the change display of the symbol on the first display unit (the function of executing the processing of steps S606 and 608 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, the second and third embodiments) Function for executing the processing of steps S1706 and S1709 of the MPU 202 in
A period measuring unit that measures the change display period determined by the period determining unit (a function of executing a process of updating the first timer counter T1 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, a function of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments) Function of updating the first variable display time counter Tx);
With
When the change display of the symbol is performed in the first display unit, the change display of the symbol is performed in a predetermined change display mode in the change display period determined by the period determination unit,
When a specific stop result corresponding to the execution of the second specific control is displayed on the second display unit in a state where the symbol change display is being performed on the first display unit, the change display period (A function for executing the suspension process of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, and temporarily suspends the measurement of the variable display time of the first result display unit 306a in the second and third embodiments) The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A5, comprising:

  According to the feature A6, when the specific stop result corresponding to the execution of the second specific control is displayed on the second display unit in a situation where the change display of the symbol is performed on the first display unit, the change display is performed. Since the measurement of the period is temporarily stopped, the player can execute the second specifying control without worrying about the symbol change display on the first display unit. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player's attention from being distracted during the second specific control, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the second specific control.

  Further, when the specific stop result corresponding to the execution of the second specific control is displayed, the lottery result by the first lottery means is not invalidated. Thereby, it is possible to diversify the aspect related to the lottery result of the first lottery means and the lottery result of the second lottery means, and to diversify the game.

  Feature A7. In a situation in which the measurement of the change display period is temporarily stopped by the pause means, the change in the second specific control based on the display of the specific stop result that triggered the temporary stop is terminated. Measurement restarting means for restarting the measurement of the display period (the function of executing the processing of steps S524 to S526 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, the variable display of the first result display unit 306a of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments) The gaming machine according to feature A6, further comprising a function of restarting time measurement).

  According to the feature A7, when the specific stop result is displayed, the measurement of the change display period is temporarily stopped, and thereafter, based on the end of the second specific control related to the display of the specific stop result, the change display period is changed. The measurement is restarted. As a result, it is possible to use the change display of the symbols up to the temporary stop and the lottery result that triggered the change display.

  Feature A8. The temporary stop unit is configured to display a non-specific stop result that does not correspond to the execution of the second specific control on the second display unit in a state where the symbol change display is being performed on the first display unit. The gaming machine according to Feature A6 or Feature A7, wherein the measurement of the change display period is not temporarily stopped.

  According to the feature A8, when the non-specific stop result is displayed on the second display unit in a state where the change display of the symbol is performed on the first display unit, the change display of the symbol on the first display unit is performed. Is performed continuously, the first specific control can be executed. Thereby, when the lottery result of the second lottery means is a non-winning result, the lottery by the first lottery means can be noticed. Therefore, the change display of the symbol based on the lottery by the second lottery means and the change display of the symbol based on the lottery by the first lottery means can be noticed stepwise. Therefore, both can be closely related.

Feature A9. The change display period and the period determination unit are a first change display period and a first period determination unit, respectively.
The second display control unit is a second period determining unit that determines a second change display period that is a period of the symbol change display on the second display unit (the processing of steps S1006 and 1209 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment). And the function of executing the processing of steps S1806 to S1808 of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments), and when the symbol change display is performed on the second display unit, the second period In the second change display period determined by the determination means, a change display of the symbol is performed in a predetermined change display mode,
Each of the period determining means,
When the lottery result by the first lottery means is a winning result corresponding to the execution of the first specific control, each change display period is set so that the first change display period is easily shorter than the second change display period. And determine
Further, when the lottery result by the first lottery means is a non-winning result that does not correspond to the execution of the first specific control, the symbol on the second display unit is displayed during the change display of the symbol on the first display unit. The gaming machine according to Feature A7 or Feature A8, wherein each of the change display periods is determined so that the change display can be performed a plurality of times.

  According to the feature A9, when the lottery result by the first lottery means is a winning result, the symbol change display on the first display unit ends at a timing before the symbol change display end timing on the second display unit. Easy to do. Thereby, the first specific control can be executed with higher priority than the second specific control.

  On the other hand, when the lottery result by the first lottery means is a non-winning result, the symbol change display on the second display unit may be performed a plurality of times during the symbol change display on the first display unit. This makes it possible to create a state in which a series of games based on the lottery by the second lottery means are continuously performed. Therefore, unexpectedness can be given to the game.

Feature A10. Launching means (playing ball launching mechanism 27) for launching a playing ball toward a game area where the playing ball flows down;
Variable ball entry means provided in the game area and capable of being switched between an open state and a closed state (the second electric win prize port 42 or the third electric win prize port 43 in the first embodiment, the second and third embodiments) The second grand prize mouth 302a) of the
Privilege granting means (a function of controlling the payout device 116 based on a prize ball command in the payout control device 117) for giving a privilege based on the entry of a game ball into the variable ballistics means;
When the second specific control is performed, the variable ball entry control means (the MPU 202 in the first embodiment executes the variable ball entry control means for executing the variable ball entry control for switching the variable ball entry means to the open state and then to the closed state). A function of executing a combination opening / closing process and a third electric combination opening / closing process, and a function of performing opening / closing control of the second special winning opening 302a in the second and third embodiments),
With
During the second specific control, the number of game balls that can enter the variable ball entry means is predetermined,
Each of the period determination means changes the change display period when the lottery result by the first lottery means is a non-winning result that does not correspond to the execution of the first specific control. The gaming machine according to Feature A9, wherein the number of times the symbol change display of the second display unit that can be performed during the symbol change display can be changed.

  According to the feature A10, when the second specific control is performed, the variable ball-in control of the variable ball-in means is performed. This makes it easy for game balls to enter the variable ball entry means, so that a privilege can be given to the player. In this case, since the number of game balls that can enter the variable ball entry means during the second specific control is predetermined, the upper limit of the privilege amount obtained during one second specific control is set. As a result, it is possible to suppress the player from being given an excessive privilege, and it is possible to easily manage the game.

  In such a configuration, the number of times of the change display of the symbol on the second display that can be performed during the display of the change of the symbol on the first display unit can be changed. Can be changed. This makes it possible to change the privilege amount given to the player while easily managing the game.

  Feature A11. The second period determination means is configured to perform the symbol change display on the first display unit when the symbol change display related to the non-winning result is performed on the first display unit. The second change display period is determined so that the second change display period is more likely to be shorter than when there is no display or when the change display of the symbol according to the winning result is performed. The gaming machine according to Feature A9 or Feature A10.

  According to the feature A11, when the change display of the symbol related to the winning result is performed on the first display unit, the relatively long second change display period is easily determined. This makes it easier for the first change display period to be shorter than the second change display period, and allows the first specific control to be executed with higher priority than the second specific control. However, if the second change display period is lengthened, the interval at which the second specific control is performed becomes longer, so that when the second specific control is continuously performed, the game may not proceed smoothly.

  On the other hand, according to the present feature, when the change display of the symbol related to the non-winning result is performed on the first display unit, the relatively short second change display period is easily determined. Thereby, when the change display of the symbol related to the non-winning result is not performed on the first display unit, the above-described inconvenience can be avoided while the first specific control is executed with higher priority than the second specific control. it can.

Feature A12. Launching means (playing ball launching mechanism 27) for launching a playing ball toward a game area where the playing ball flows down;
A ball entry portion (upper working port 401 in the third embodiment) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball;
A variable ball entry means (lower working port 402 in the third embodiment) provided in the game area and capable of switching between an open state and a closed state;
A variable ball entry control means for executing variable ball entry control for switching the variable ball entry unit to the closed state after the variable ball entry unit is set to the open state (a function of executing steps S2008 to S2010 in the MPU 202);
With
The first lottery opportunity is that a game ball enters the entry section,
The second lottery opportunity is that a game ball enters the variable ball entry means,
Based on the fact that the symbol change display corresponding to the lottery result of the first lottery means being a non-winning result that does not correspond to the execution of the first specific control is performed on the first display unit, the variable entry is performed. From a low expectation state (low frequency support mode) where the expectation of entering the ball means is relatively low, a high expectation state (high frequency) where the expectation of entering the variable ball means is relatively high The game according to any one of features A9 to A11, characterized by comprising means for shifting to a support mode (a function of executing steps S2005 and S2009 or steps S2006 and S2010 in the MPU 202). Machine.

  According to the feature A12, based on the fact that the pattern change display corresponding to the fact that the lottery result of the first lottery means is a non-winning result is performed on the first display unit, the expectation of the variable ball-taking means to enter the ball is performed. The degree increases. Accordingly, the lottery by the second lottery means is easily performed, and thus the second specific control is easily performed in a state where the symbol change display based on the non-winning result is performed on the first display unit. Therefore, it is possible to increase the execution frequency of the second specifying control in a situation where the symbol change according to the non-winning result is performed on the first display unit.

  In addition, as a specific configuration of this feature, for example, as a unit mode when the variable ball-in control is performed once by the variable ball-in control means, the variable ball-in control in the open state A high expectation mode and a low expectation mode are set so that the expectation of the game ball entering the ball means is relatively high and low, and the non-winning result is the first display unit. A configuration in which the aspect of the variable pitching means is switched from the low-expectation mode to the high-expectation mode based on the change display of the symbol corresponding to the above is considered.

Feature A13. The change display period, the period determination unit, and the period measurement unit are a first change display period, a first period determination unit, and a first period measurement unit, respectively.
The second display control means includes:
A second period determining means for determining a second change display period that is a period of the symbol change display on the second display unit (a function of executing the processing of steps S1006 and 1209 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment);
A second period measuring unit that measures the second change display period determined by the second period determining unit (executes a process of updating the second timer counter T2 or the third timer counter T3 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment) Function),
With
When the change display of the symbol is performed on the second display unit, the change display of the symbol is performed in a predetermined change display mode in the change display period determined by the second period determination means,
Whether to execute third specific control (support of the third electric accessory 43a) different from each specific control based on a third lottery opportunity (winning to the third through gate 53) different from each of the lottery opportunities. A third lottery unit (a function of executing the process of step S1209 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment) for performing a lottery of whether or not the lottery is selected;
A third display for starting a change display of symbols on a third display unit different from each of the display units based on the lottery by the third lottery means, and displaying a stop result corresponding to the lottery result by the third lottery means. Control means (the function of executing the processing of steps S1204 to S1214 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment);
With
The third display control means includes:
A third period determination unit (a function of executing the processing of S1209 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment) for determining a third change display period that is a period of the symbol change display on the third display unit;
A third period measuring unit (a function of updating the third timer counter T3 in the first embodiment) for measuring the third change display period determined by the third period determining unit;
With
When the change display of the symbol is performed on the third display unit, the change display of the symbol is performed in a predetermined change display mode in the change display period determined by the third period determination means,
The third display control means can start the change display of the symbol on the third display portion during the change display of the symbol on the first display portion or the second display portion,
The pause means,
When a specific stop result corresponding to the execution of the second specific control is displayed on the second display unit in a state where the symbol change display is being performed on each of the display units, the first period measuring unit and Suspending the measurement of each of the change display periods by the third period measuring means,
When a specific stop result corresponding to the execution of the third specific control is displayed on the third display unit in a state where the symbol change display is being performed on each of the display units, the first period measuring unit and The gaming machine according to any one of features A6 to A12, wherein the measurement of each of the change display periods by the second period measurement unit is temporarily stopped.

  According to the feature A13, the lottery of the third lottery means and the change display of the symbol on the third display unit are performed independently of the other lottery and the change display of the other symbols.

  In such a configuration, when the specific stop result is displayed on one of the second display unit and the third display unit, the measurement of the change display period on the other display units is temporarily stopped. Thereby, the player can execute the specific control without worrying about the change display of the symbols on the other display units. Thereby, the degree of attention to the specific control can be increased.

  Further, according to the relationship with the feature A7, the specific stop result is displayed on one of the second display unit and the third display unit, so that the measurement of the change display period on the other display unit is temporarily stopped. Then, the measurement is restarted based on the end of the specific control relating to the specific stop result. Thereby, the interval between one specific control and the next specific control can be made irregular, and the monotony of the game can be suppressed.

  Feature A14. Features A1 to A13, characterized in that a regulation means for regulating the lottery by the second lottery means during the first specific control (such as a function of affirmatively determining the processing of step S901 or step S1201 of the MPU 202) is provided. A gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims.

  According to the feature A14, since the lottery by the second lottery means is restricted during the first specific control, an event in which the first specific control and the second specific control are simultaneously executed can be avoided. Thus, it is possible to avoid complication of the game which may be caused by the provision of the two lottery means and the two specific controls, and it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

  Feature A15. When the lottery result by the first lottery means is a non-winning result that does not correspond to the execution of the first specific control, the invalidating means does not invalidate the lottery result of the second lottery means. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A14, characterized in that:

  According to the feature A15, when the lottery result by the first lottery means is a non-winning result, the second lottery means can be executed because the lottery result of the second lottery means is not invalidated. Thereby, when the lottery result of the first lottery means is a non-winning result, it is possible to pay attention to the lottery by the second lottery means. Therefore, the lottery by the first lottery means and the lottery by the second lottery means can be noticed stepwise. Therefore, both can be closely related.

  Feature A16. The gaming machine according to Feature A15, wherein the state in which the second specific control is being executed is more advantageous to the player than the state in which the first specific control is being executed.

  According to the feature A16, it is assumed that the player plays the game expecting that the lottery result by the first lottery means will be a non-winning result. Thereby, unlike a conventional game that is advantageous to a player when a winning result is obtained, unexpectedness can be given to the game.

Feature A17. Launching means (playing ball launching mechanism 27) for launching a playing ball toward a game area where the playing ball flows down;
First variable ball entry means provided in the game area and capable of switching between an open state and a closed state (the first electric winning hole 41 in the first embodiment, the first large winning opening in the second and third embodiments) 301a) and second variable winning means (the second winning combination 42 or the third winning opening 43 in the first embodiment, the second winning combination 302a in the second and third embodiments),
Privilege granting means (a function of controlling the payout device 116 based on the prize ball command in the payout control device 117) for granting a privilege based on the entry of a game ball into each of the variable ballistic means.
With
In the first specific control, an opening / closing operation of the first variable ball entry means is performed,
In the second specific control, an opening / closing operation of the second variable ball entry means is performed,
The expected degree of entering the second variable entering means in the second specific control is set higher than the expected degree of entering the first variable entering means in the first specific control. The gaming machine according to feature A16, wherein the gaming machine is provided.

  According to the feature A17, the degree of expectation of entering the second variable ball entry means in the second specific control is set higher than the degree of expectation of entering the first variable ball entry means in the first specific control. Therefore, the benefits given to the player in the second specific control are more likely to be increased. Thus, the state in which the second specific control is performed is more advantageous to the player than the state in which the first specific control is performed.

  In addition, as a specific configuration of this feature, for example, a configuration that “provides a regulation unit that regulates the entry into the first variable ball entry means” can be considered.

  Incidentally, for any one of the above-mentioned features A1 to A17, the following features C1 to C10, the following features D1 to D7, the following features E1 to E7, the following features F1 to F4, the following features G1 to G4, and the following features H1 A configuration limited to any one of H4 to H4 may be applied. In this case, a further effect can be obtained by applying each configuration.

<Characteristic B group>
Feature B1. Based on the first lottery opportunity (winning of the first through gate 51 in the first embodiment, winning of the upper operating ports 303 and 401 in the second and third embodiments), the first specific control (first embodiment) 1st lottery means (the process of step S603 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to execute the support of the first electric accessory 41a in the first embodiment and the first opening / closing execution mode in the second and third embodiments. Function for executing the processing of step S1703 of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments),
The second lottery opportunity different from the first lottery opportunity (winning to the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53 in the first embodiment, winning to the lower operating ports 304 and 402 in the second and third embodiments) ) Based on the second specific control (the support of the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a in the first embodiment, the second opening / closing in the second and third embodiments) The second lottery means (the function of executing the processing of S1003 or S1209 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, the processing of S1803 of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments) for performing the lottery as to whether or not to execute the execution mode. Function to perform)
Based on the lottery by the first lottery means, a symbol change display is started on the first display unit (the first unit area 71 in the first embodiment, the first result display unit 306a in the second and third embodiments). A first display control means for displaying a stop result corresponding to the lottery result of the first lottery means (the function of executing the processing of steps S505 to S517 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, the second display control means in the second and third embodiments) A function of controlling display of the first result display unit 306a of the MPU 202);
Based on the lottery by the second lottery means, a second display section different from the first display section (the second unit area 72 or the third unit area 73 in the first embodiment, the second display area in the second and third embodiments) A second display control unit (step S905 to step S914 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment) for starting the change display of the symbol on the second result display unit 306b and displaying the stop result corresponding to the lottery result of the second lottery unit. A function of executing the processing of steps S1204 to S1214, a function of performing display control of the second result display unit 306b of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments), and
With
The first display control means includes:
A first period determining means for determining a first change display period that is a symbol change display period in the first display unit (a function of executing the processing of steps S606 and 608 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, a second and a third A function of executing the processing of steps S1706 and S1709 of the MPU 202 in the embodiment);
A first period measuring means for measuring the first change display period (a function of executing a process for updating the first timer counter T1 in the first embodiment, a first change display time counter of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments) Tx update function), and
With
When the change display of the symbol is performed on the first display unit, the change display of the symbol is performed in a predetermined change display mode in the change display period determined by the first period determination means,
The second display control means includes:
Second period determining means for determining a second change display period which is a symbol change display period in the second display unit (the function of executing the processing of steps S1006 and 1209 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, the second and third A function of executing the processing of steps S1806 to S1808 of the MPU 202 in the embodiment);
Second period measuring means for measuring the second change display period (the function of executing the process of updating the second timer counter T2 or the third timer counter T3 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, the second and third embodiments) A function of updating the second variable display time counter Ty of the MPU 202);
With
When the change display of the symbol is performed on the second display unit, the change display of the symbol is performed in a predetermined change display mode in the change display period determined by the second period determination means,
The second change is performed based on the fact that the specific stop result corresponding to the execution of the first specific control is displayed on the first display unit in a situation where the symbol change display is being performed on each of the display units. While the measurement of the display period was stopped, a specific stop result corresponding to the execution of the second specific control was displayed on the second display unit in a state where the symbol change display was being performed on each of the display units. A gaming machine comprising a measurement stopping means (a function of executing a temporary stop process and a variable reset process of the MPU 202) for stopping the measurement of the first change display period based on the above.

  According to the feature B1, the lottery by the first lottery means and the lottery by the second lottery means are respectively executed independently, and based on these lotteries, the change display of the symbol is displayed on the first display unit and the second display unit. Each is done independently. When the specific display result is displayed on the first display unit or the second display unit after the change display period corresponding to each display unit has elapsed, the first specific control or the second specific control is performed. Be executed. Thereby, an event in which the first specific control or the second specific control is executed may occur during the change display of the symbol on the one display unit, so that it is possible to provide a novel game, and to improve the interest. Can be.

  In such a configuration, the measurement of the change display period for the other display unit is stopped based on the display of the specific stop result on one display unit in a situation where the change display of the symbol is being performed on each display unit. . This allows the player to execute the specific control based on the specific stop result without worrying about the symbol change display on the other display unit. Thus, it is possible to prevent the player's attention from being distracted during the specific control, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the specific control.

Feature B2. The measurement stopping unit may be configured such that a specific stop result corresponding to the execution of the second specific control is displayed on the second display unit in a state where the symbol change display is being performed on the first display unit. A temporary stop means (a function of executing a temporary stop process of the MPU 202) for temporarily stopping the measurement of the first change display period based on the
Based on the end of the second specific control based on the display of the specific stop result, a measurement resuming unit (a function of executing the processing of steps S524 to S526 of the MPU 202) that restarts the measurement of the first change display period. The gaming machine according to Feature B1, further comprising:

  According to the feature B2, when the specific stop result is displayed on the second display unit, the measurement of the first change display period is temporarily stopped, and then the second specific control based on the display of the specific stop result ends. Based on this, the measurement of the first change display period is restarted. As a result, it is possible to use the change display of the symbols up to the temporary stop and the lottery result that triggered the change display.

  Feature B3. The temporary stop unit is configured to display a non-specific stop result that does not correspond to the execution of the second specific control on the second display unit in a state where the symbol change display is being performed on the first display unit. The gaming machine according to Feature B2, wherein the measurement of the first change display period is not temporarily stopped.

  According to the feature B3, when a non-specific stop result is displayed on the second display unit in a situation where the symbol change display is being performed on the first display unit, the symbol change display on the first display unit is performed. Is performed continuously, the first specific control can be executed. Thereby, when the lottery result of the second lottery means is a non-winning result, the lottery by the first lottery means can be noticed. Therefore, the change display of the symbol based on the lottery by the second lottery means and the change display of the symbol based on the lottery by the first lottery means can be noticed stepwise. Therefore, both can be closely related.

  Feature B4. Each of the period determining means may perform the symbol change display on the second display unit a plurality of times during the symbol change display on the first display unit when a predetermined specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to Feature B2 or Feature B3, wherein the change display periods are determined so as to be possible.

  According to the feature B4, when the specific condition is satisfied, the symbol change display on the second display unit may be performed a plurality of times during the symbol change display on the first display unit. This makes it possible to create a state in which a series of games based on the lottery by the second lottery means are continuously performed. Therefore, while the lottery by each lottery means and the change display of the symbol on each display section are performed independently, when a specific condition is satisfied, a series of games based on the lottery by the second lottery means are continuously performed. As a result, it is possible to give the game unexpectedness.

Feature B5. Launching means (playing ball launching mechanism 27) for launching a playing ball toward a game area where the playing ball flows down;
Variable ball entry means provided in the game area and capable of being switched between an open state and a closed state (the second electric win prize port 42 or the third electric win prize port 43 in the first embodiment, the second and third embodiments) The second grand prize mouth 302a) of the
Privilege granting means (a function of controlling the payout device 116 based on a prize ball command in the payout control device 117) for giving a privilege based on the entry of a game ball into the variable ballistics means;
When the second specific control is executed, the variable ball entry control means performs variable ball entry control to switch the variable ball entry means to the closed state after the variable ball entry means is opened (the MPU 202 in the first embodiment). (2) a function of performing the opening and closing process of the third electrical role, and a function of performing the opening and closing control of the second winning port 302a of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments.
With
During the second specific control, the number of game balls that can enter the variable ball entry means is predetermined,
When the specific condition is satisfied, the respective period determining means changes the respective change display periods, thereby enabling the second display unit to perform the change display of the symbol on the first display unit. The gaming machine according to Feature B4, wherein the number of times of the symbol change display is changeable.

  According to the feature B5, when the second specific control is performed, the variable ball-in control of the variable ball-in means is performed. This makes it easy for game balls to enter the variable ball entry means, so that a privilege can be given to the player. In this case, since the number of game balls that can enter the variable ball entry means during the second specific control is predetermined, the upper limit of the privilege amount obtained during one second specific control is set. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the player from being given an excessive privilege, and it is possible to easily manage the game.

  In such a configuration, the number of times of the change display of the symbol on the second display that can be performed during the display of the change of the symbol on the first display unit can be changed. Can be changed. This makes it possible to change the privilege amount given to the player while easily managing the game.

Feature B6. A third lottery unit (step S1209 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment) that performs a lottery based on a third lottery opportunity different from the respective lottery triggers to determine whether or not to execute a third specific control different from each of the specific controls. Function to execute the process), and
A third display for starting a change display of symbols on a third display unit different from each of the display units based on the lottery by the third lottery means, and displaying a stop result corresponding to the lottery result by the third lottery means. Control means (the function of executing the processing of steps S1204 to S1214 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment);
With
The third display control means includes:
A third period determination unit (a function of executing the processing of S1209 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment) for determining a third change display period that is a period of the symbol change display on the third display unit;
A third period measuring means for measuring the third change display period (a function of updating the third timer counter T3 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment);
With
When the change display of the symbol is performed on the third display unit, the change display of the symbol is performed in a predetermined change display mode in the change display period determined by the third period determination means,
The third display control means can start the change display of the symbol on the third display portion during the change display of the symbol on the first display portion or the second display portion,
The pause means,
When a specific stop result corresponding to the execution of the second specific control is displayed on the second display unit in a state where the symbol change display is being performed on each of the display units, the first period measuring unit and Suspending the measurement of each of the change display periods by the third period measuring means,
When a specific stop result corresponding to the execution of the third specific control is displayed on the third display unit in a state where the symbol change display is being performed on each of the display units, the first period measuring unit and The measurement of each of the change display periods by the second period measurement unit is temporarily stopped,
The measurement resuming means is for resuming the measurement of each of the change display periods temporarily suspended by the suspending means based on the termination of the specific control relating to the specific stop result. The gaming machine according to any one of features B2 to B5.

  According to the feature B6, the lottery of the third lottery means and the change display of the symbol on the third display unit are performed independently of the other lottery and the change display of the other symbols.

  In such a configuration, when the specific stop result is displayed on one of the second display unit and the third display unit, the measurement of the change display period on the other display units is temporarily stopped. Then, the measurement is restarted based on the end of the specific control related to the specific stop result. Thereby, the player can execute the specific control without worrying about the change display of the symbols on the other display units. Thereby, the degree of attention to the specific control can be increased.

  According to the relationship between the symbol change display on the second display unit and the symbol change display on the third display unit, the specific stop result is displayed on one display unit, and the change display on the other display unit is displayed. The measurement of the period is temporarily stopped, and the measurement is restarted based on the end of the specific control according to the specific stop result. Thereby, the interval between one specific control and the next specific control can be made irregular, and the monotony of the game can be suppressed.

  Feature B7. The measurement stopping means may be configured such that a specific stop result corresponding to the execution of the first specific control is displayed on the first display unit in a state where the symbol change display is being performed on the second display unit. Invalidating the measurement of the second change display period on the basis of the second change display period, thereby invalidating the change display of the symbol on the second display unit, and further determining the lottery result of the second lottery means which triggered the change display. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B6, further comprising an invalidating unit (a function of executing a variable reset process of the MPU 202) for invalidating.

  According to the feature B7, when the specific stop result corresponding to the execution of the first specific control is displayed on the first display unit, the change display of the symbol performed on the second display unit and the trigger of the change display are performed. The lottery result of the second lottery means that has become invalid is invalidated. Thereby, while performing the lottery by each lottery means and the symbol change display in each display unit independently, the lottery by the first lottery means and the symbol change display by the second lottery means and the symbol change display in the second display unit are performed. The change display of the symbol on the first display unit can be prioritized. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel game in which the change of the symbol in each lottery means and each display unit is independently performed and the lottery results of these lottery means are related.

Feature B8. Each of the period determining means,
When the lottery result by the first lottery means is a winning result corresponding to the execution of the first specific control, each change display period is set so that the first change display period is easily shorter than the second change display period. And determine
Further, when the lottery result by the first lottery means is a non-winning result that does not correspond to the execution of the first specific control, the first change display period is set to be longer than the second change display period. The gaming machine according to Feature B7, which determines a change display period.

  According to the feature B8, when the lottery result by the first lottery means is a winning result, the symbol change display on the first display unit ends at a timing before the symbol change display end timing on the second display unit. Easy to do. Thereby, the first specific control can be executed with higher priority than the second specific control.

  On the other hand, when the lottery result by the first lottery means is a non-winning result, the change display of the symbols on the second display unit is likely to end at a timing before the end timing of the change display of the symbols on the first display unit. Thus, the second specific control can be executed with higher priority than the first specific control. Therefore, the specific control to be executed can be made different depending on the first change display period. Therefore, it is possible to closely associate the change display of the symbol on the first display unit with the game state.

  Feature B9. The second period determination means is configured to perform the symbol change display on the first display unit when the symbol change display related to the non-winning result is performed on the first display unit. The second change display period is determined so that the second change display period is more likely to be shorter than when there is no display or when the change display of the symbol according to the winning result is performed. The gaming machine according to Feature B8.

  According to the feature B9, when the change display of the symbol related to the winning result is performed on the first display unit, the relatively long second change display period is easily determined. This makes it easier for the first change display period to be shorter than the second change display period, and allows the first specific control to be executed with higher priority than the second specific control. However, if the second change display period is made longer, the interval at which the second specific control is performed becomes longer, so that the game may not proceed smoothly. In particular, according to the configuration of the feature B4, the second specific control can be continuously performed, so that the above-described inconvenience is likely to be significant.

  On the other hand, according to the present feature, when the change display of the symbol related to the non-winning result is performed on the first display unit, the relatively short second change display period is easily determined. Thereby, when the change display of the symbol related to the non-winning result is not performed on the first display unit, the above-described inconvenience can be avoided while the first specific control is executed with higher priority than the second specific control. it can.

Feature B10. Launching means (playing ball launching mechanism 27) for launching a playing ball toward a game area where the playing ball flows down;
A ball entry portion (upper working port 401 in the third embodiment) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball;
A variable ball entry means (lower working port 402 in the third embodiment) provided in the game area and capable of switching between an open state and a closed state;
A variable ball entry control means for executing variable ball entry control for switching the variable ball entry unit to the closed state after the variable ball entry unit is set to the open state (a function of executing steps S2008 to S2010 in the MPU 202);
With
The first lottery opportunity is that a game ball enters the entry section,
The second lottery opportunity is that a game ball enters the variable ball entry means,
Based on the fact that the symbol change display corresponding to the lottery result of the first lottery means being a non-winning result that does not correspond to the execution of the first specific control is performed on the first display unit, the variable entry is performed. From a low expectation state (low frequency support mode) where the expectation of entering the ball means is relatively low, a high expectation state (high frequency) where the expectation of entering the variable ball means is relatively high The gaming machine according to Feature B8 or Feature B9, further comprising means for shifting to a support mode (a function of executing the processing of Steps S2005 and S2009 or Steps S2006 and S2010 in the MPU 202).

  According to the feature B10, based on the fact that the symbol change display corresponding to the fact that the lottery result of the first lottery means is a non-winning result is performed on the first display unit, the expectation of the ball to be entered into the variable ballistics means is performed. The degree increases. Accordingly, the lottery by the second lottery means is easily performed, and thus the second specific control is easily performed in a situation where the change display of the symbol according to the non-winning result is performed on the first display unit. Therefore, it is possible to increase the execution frequency of the second specifying control in a situation where the symbol change according to the non-winning result is performed on the first display unit.

  In addition, as a specific configuration of this feature, for example, as a unit mode when the variable ball-in control is performed once by the variable ball-in control means, the variable ball-in control in the open state A high expectation mode and a low expectation mode are set so that the expectation of the game ball entering the ball means is relatively high and low, and the non-winning result is the first display unit. A configuration in which the aspect of the variable pitching means is switched from the low-expectation mode to the high-expectation mode based on the change display of the symbol corresponding to the above is considered.

Feature B11. Launching means (playing ball launching mechanism 27) for launching a playing ball toward a game area where the playing ball flows down;
A first ball entry portion (first through gate 51 in the first embodiment, upper working ports 303 and 401 in the second and third embodiments) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball, and a second ball entry portion. A spherical portion (the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53 in the first embodiment, the lower working ports 304 and 402 in the second and third embodiments),
With
The first lottery opportunity is that a game ball enters the first entry section,
The second lottery opportunity is that a game ball enters the second entry section,
The feature B7 is characterized in that it is configured such that when the launch operation is performed aiming at the ball entry into the second ball entry section, the ball entry into the first ball entry section can occur. The gaming machine according to any one of B10.

  According to the feature B11, when aiming at the ball entry into the second ball entry section, the ball entry into the first ball entry section can naturally occur. Thus, by adjusting the launch mode of the game ball, it is possible to suppress the act of intentionally causing the second ball-entering section to enter the ball. Therefore, the change display of the symbol on the second display unit is preferentially performed over the display change of the symbol on the first display unit, and the act of intentionally executing the second specific control can be suppressed. It is possible to prevent a game different from the game being played.

Feature B12. The first ball entry part and the second ball entry part are a first passage part (first through gate 51) and a second passage part (second through gate 52 or third through gate 53) through which a game ball can pass. And
The relative positional relationship between the first passing portion and the second passing portion is set such that the game ball that has passed through the first passing portion can pass through the second passing portion,
A game ball such that a frequency at which a game ball passes through the second passage portion without passing through the first passage portion is lower than a frequency at which the game ball passes through the first passage portion and passes through the second passage portion. The gaming machine according to Feature B11, further comprising a flow-down mode restricting means (restriction nail 64b) for restricting the flow-down mode.

  According to the feature B12, the game ball easily passes through the second passing portion after passing through the first passing portion. Thereby, after the lottery is performed by the first lottery means, the lottery is easily performed by the second lottery means. Therefore, the start timing of the symbol change display on the first display unit is likely to be earlier than the start timing of the symbol change display on the second display unit. Therefore, the frequency at which the change display of the symbol on the first display unit ends during the change display of the symbol on the second display unit can be further increased.

  Feature B13. It is characterized in that a regulation means (a function of affirmatively determining the process of step S901 or step S1201 of the MPU 202) that regulates the execution of the change display of the symbol on the second display unit during the first specific control is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of features B7 to B12.

  According to the feature B13, since the execution of the symbol change display on the second display unit is restricted during the first specific control, the first specific control can be performed without worrying about the symbol change display on the second display unit. Can be performed. This can prevent the player's attention from being distracted.

  Feature B14. The invalidating unit may be configured to display a non-specific stop result that does not correspond to the execution of the first specific control on the first display unit in a state where the symbol change display is being performed on the second display unit. The present invention does not invalidate the change display of the symbol on the second display unit and the lottery result of the second lottery means which has triggered the change display in any one of the features B7 to B13. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  According to the feature B14, when the non-specific stop result is displayed on the first display unit, the change display of the symbol on the second display unit and the lottery result of the second lottery means which triggered the change display are displayed. Since it is not invalidated, the second specific control can be executed. Thereby, it is possible to pay attention to the change display of the symbol on the second display unit. Therefore, the lottery by the first lottery means and the lottery by the second lottery means can be noticed stepwise. Therefore, both can be closely related.

  Feature B15. The gaming machine according to Feature B14, wherein the state in which the second specific control is being executed is more advantageous for the player than the state in which the first specific control is being executed.

  According to the feature B15, it is assumed that the player plays the game expecting that the lottery result by the first lottery means will be a non-winning result. Thereby, unlike a conventional game that is advantageous to a player when a winning result is obtained, unexpectedness can be given to the game.

Feature B16. Launching means (playing ball launching mechanism 27) for launching a playing ball toward a game area where the playing ball flows down;
First variable ball entry means provided in the game area and capable of switching between an open state and a closed state (the first electric winning hole 41 in the first embodiment, the first large winning opening in the second and third embodiments) 301a) and second variable winning means (the second winning combination 42 or the third winning opening 43 in the first embodiment, the second winning combination 302a in the second and third embodiments),
Privilege granting means (a function of controlling the payout device 116 based on the prize ball command in the payout control device 117) for granting a privilege based on the entry of a game ball into each of the variable ballistic means.
With
In the first specific control, an opening / closing operation of the first variable ball entry means is performed,
In the second specific control, an opening / closing operation of the second variable ball entry means is performed,
The expected degree of entering the second variable entering means in the second specific control is set higher than the expected degree of entering the first variable entering means in the first specific control. The gaming machine according to feature B15, wherein

  According to the feature B16, the degree of expectation of entering the second variable ball entry means in the second specific control is set higher than the degree of expectation of entering the first variable ball entry means in the first specific control. Therefore, the benefits given to the player in the second specific control are more likely to be increased. Thus, the state in which the second specific control is performed is more advantageous to the player than the state in which the first specific control is performed.

  In addition, as a specific configuration of this feature, for example, a configuration that “provides a regulation unit that regulates the entry into the first variable ball entry means” can be considered.

Feature B17. Based on the first lottery opportunity (winning of the first through gate 51 in the first embodiment, winning of the upper operating ports 303 and 401 in the second and third embodiments), the first specific control (first embodiment) 1st lottery means (the process of step S603 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to execute the support of the first electric accessory 41a in the first embodiment and the first opening / closing execution mode in the second and third embodiments. Function for executing the processing of step S1703 of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments),
The second lottery opportunity different from the first lottery opportunity (winning to the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53 in the first embodiment, winning to the lower operating ports 304 and 402 in the second and third embodiments) ) Based on the second specific control (the support of the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a in the first embodiment, the second opening / closing in the second and third embodiments) The second lottery means (the function of executing the processing of S1003 or S1209 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, the processing of S1803 of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments) for performing the lottery as to whether or not to execute the execution mode. Function to perform)
Based on the lottery by the first lottery means, a symbol change display is started on the first display unit (the first unit area 71 in the first embodiment, the first result display unit 306a in the second and third embodiments). A first display control means for displaying a stop result corresponding to the lottery result of the first lottery means (the function of executing the processing of steps S505 to S517 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, the second display control means in the second and third embodiments) A function of controlling display of the first result display unit 306a of the MPU 202);
Based on the lottery by the second lottery means, a second display section different from the first display section (the second unit area 72 or the third unit area 73 in the first embodiment, the second display area in the second and third embodiments) A second display control unit (step S905 to step S914 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment) for starting the change display of the symbol on the second result display unit 306b and displaying the stop result corresponding to the lottery result of the second lottery unit. A function of executing the processing of steps S1204 to S1214, a function of performing display control of the second result display unit 306b of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments), and
With
The first display control means includes:
A first period determining means for determining a first change display period that is a symbol change display period in the first display unit (a function of executing the processing of steps S606 and 608 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, a second and a third A function of executing the processing of steps S1706 and S1709 of the MPU 202 in the embodiment);
A first period measuring means for measuring the first change display period (a function of executing a process for updating the first timer counter T1 in the first embodiment, a first change display time counter of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments) Tx update function), and
With
When the change display of the symbol is performed on the first display unit, the change display of the symbol is performed in a predetermined change display mode in the change display period determined by the first period determination means,
The first change display is performed based on a specific stop result corresponding to the execution of the second specific control being displayed on the second display unit in a state where the symbol change display is being performed on each of the display units. A gaming machine comprising a measurement stopping means (a function of executing a temporary stop process and a fluctuation reset process of the MPU 202) for stopping a period measurement.

  According to the feature B17, the lottery by the first lottery unit and the lottery by the second lottery unit are respectively executed independently, and based on these lotteries, the change display of the symbol is displayed on the first display unit and the second display unit. Each is done independently. When the specific display result is displayed on the first display unit or the second display unit after the change display period corresponding to each display unit has elapsed, the first specific control or the second specific control is performed. Be executed. Thereby, an event in which the first specific control or the second specific control is executed may occur during the change display of the symbol on the one display unit, so that it is possible to provide a novel game, and to improve the interest. Can be.

  In such a configuration, the measurement of the change display period of the first display unit is stopped based on the specific stop result being displayed on the second display unit in a situation where the change display of the symbol is being performed on each display unit. . This allows the player to execute the second specifying control without worrying about the symbol change display on the first display unit. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player's attention from being distracted during the second specific control, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the second specific control.

  By the way, with respect to any one of the above features B1 to B17, the following features C1 to C10, the following features D1 to D7, the following features E1 to E7, the following features F1 to F4, the following features G1 to G4, and the following features H1 A configuration limited to any one of H4 to H4 may be applied. In this case, a further effect can be obtained by applying each configuration.

<Characteristic C group>
Feature C1. An information acquisition unit that acquires special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (a function of executing a prize winning process for the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, a function of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments). A function to execute a winning process for the operating port),
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as a plurality of numbers up to a predetermined number defined as the upper limit (the first electric utility holding area 231 in the first embodiment, the second and third implementation Holding ball storage area 321) in the form,
A determination is made as to whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage unit corresponds to the preset addition information, and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage unit. In this case, an assignment determining means for sequentially performing the assignment determination on the plurality of pieces of special information (the function of executing the support lottery process of the first general-purpose change start process in the MPU 202 of the first embodiment, the second and third implementations) A function of executing the process of step S1703 in the MPU 202 of the embodiment);
The game state is shifted to a predetermined assignment corresponding state based on that the assignment determination result by the assignment determining unit is an assignment corresponding result indicating that the special information to be determined corresponds to the assignment information. Shifting means (a function of executing the first electrical opening / closing process of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, and a function of shifting to the first opening / closing execution mode in the second and third embodiments);
Prior to the provision of the provision determination by the provision determination means or based on the provision of the provision determination by the provision determination means, a game replay operation is started and corresponds to the determination result of the provision determination means. The end of the game replay operation as a notification result is set as one of the game turns, and the game replay operation of each game time is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Game time control means (steps S505 to S505 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment) for controlling predetermined notification means (the first unit area 71 in the first embodiment, the first result display section 306a in the second and third embodiments) A function of executing the processing of S517, a function of performing display control of the first result display unit 306a of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments), and
In a gaming machine equipped with
The game time control means, when the determination result of the grant determination means is a winning game time corresponding to the grant response result, from the end timing of the winning game time to the grant response period corresponding to the grant response state ( In the first embodiment, when the period in which the first electric accessory 41a is supported and the period in which the first opening / closing execution mode is performed in the second and third embodiments have elapsed, the next winning game time To start the game round,
The information that reflects the determination result when the special information related to the next game round among the special information acquired by the information acquisition unit is the target of the assignment determination, is compared with the time when the next game round is started. The destination specifying means for specifying at the previous timing (the function of executing the confirmation processing for the reservation notice of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, and the function of executing the processing of setting the reservation command of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments) When,
On the basis of the result of the identification by the preceding identification means, the grant corresponding period after the end of the winning game time and the game time operation period in which the next game time is performed, and A gaming machine comprising: an effect executing means for performing a game rendition effect (a function of executing a normal hold advance notice effect and a time reduction normal hold advance effect at the MPU 242).

  According to the feature C1, when the winning game time is performed, the next game time is started after an end of the winning game time and a lapse of the giving response period corresponding to the giving corresponding state. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a new game cycle from being started during the giving-response state, and it is possible to prevent the player's attention from being distracted.

  In such a configuration, since the game rendition effect is executed over the granting response period and the game recall operation period, a period longer than the game recall operation period can be secured as the game rendition production effect period. This makes it possible to set an effect that is continuous over a long period of time that cannot be set within the game round operation period as a game round effect. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the game rendition, and to improve the interest.

  Feature C2. The effect execution means causes the predetermined display means (display screen G) to start changing the display of the pattern at least at a timing before the start timing of the next game time as the game time effect, and The stop result corresponding to the specified result of the preceding specifying means is displayed at a timing later than the start timing of the round and before the end timing of the next game round, wherein the stop result is displayed. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature C2, the variable display of the picture is performed over the giving correspondence period and the game round operation period. This allows the player to recognize the game rendition as a series of effects spanning the granting period and the game recall operation period.

  Feature C3. The effect execution means, when the special information related to the next game time has been acquired at a timing before the end timing of the winning game time, the grant corresponding period corresponding to the winning game time The gaming machine according to the feature C1 or the feature C2, wherein the gaming rendition is executed based on being started.

  According to the feature C3, when the special information related to the next game time has already been acquired at the end timing of the winning game time, the game time effect is executed from the start of the grant corresponding period. As a result, it is possible to secure the production period of the game rendition for the provision period.

Feature C4. When the special information related to the next game time is acquired during the grant corresponding period, the acquisition timing of the special information is set so that the game effect is finished by the end timing of the next game time. An effect period determining means (a function of executing the process of step S1412 in the MPU 242) for determining an effect period according to a period up to the end timing of the grant corresponding period;
When the special information related to the next game time is acquired during the giving corresponding period, the effect execution unit executes the game time effect over the effect period determined by the effect period determining unit. The gaming machine according to feature C2 or feature C3, wherein

  According to the feature C4, when special information related to the next game time is acquired during the provision period, the game time effect is executed. Thereby, the frequency of execution of the game rendition can be increased, so that the degree of attention to the game during the provision period can be further improved.

  In this case, the effect period is set such that the game effect is completed by the end timing of the next game operation. Thereby, the game effect is ended at a timing later than the end timing of the next game operation, and the inconvenience that the game effect influences the next game operation can be avoided.

Feature C5. Launching means (playing ball launching mechanism 27) for launching a playing ball toward a game area where the playing ball flows down;
Variable ball entry means provided in the game area and capable of switching between an open state and a closed state (the first winning combination 41 in the first embodiment, the first large winning opening 301a in the second and third embodiments). When,
Privilege granting means (a function of controlling the payout device 116 based on a prize ball command in the payout control device 117) based on the fact that a game ball enters the variable ballistic means,
A variable ball entry control means for executing variable ball entry control for switching the variable ball entry means to the closed state after the variable ball entry means is in the open state (the function of executing the first electric opening / closing process of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment; And a function of controlling the opening and closing of the first winning port 301a of the MPU 202 in the third embodiment) and
With
Either the variable corresponding ball entry means is in the open state for a predetermined upper limit period, or a predetermined number of game balls enter the variable ball input means for the predetermined upper limit period. It is a specific game period in which the specific game in which the variable ball-in control is continued until the event occurs is performed,
Limiting means for limiting the number of balls entering the variable ball entry means so that the number of balls entering the variable ball entry means during the upper limit period does not reach the upper limit number (the first specific regulation nail in the first embodiment) 64c, the gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4, comprising the control nail 307b) of the second and third embodiments.

  According to the feature C5, the specific game period in which the specific game is performed based on the end of the winning game round is set. The specific game ends when any of the events of the elapse of the upper limit period or the entry of the upper limit number of balls occurs. Thereby, the amount of privilege given to the player can be adjusted, and the management of the game can be suitably performed.

  In such a configuration, the number of balls entering the variable ball entry means during the upper limit period does not reach the upper limit number. This allows the specific game period to correspond to only the upper limit period without depending on the ball entry timing of the game ball, so that it is possible to easily grasp the production period of the game rendition. Therefore, it is possible to easily perform the game round effect.

Feature C6. The grant corresponding period is different depending on the special information targeted for the grant determination in the winning game round,
The effect performing means includes means for determining an effect period of the game effect in association with the application corresponding period, and executes the game effect over an effect period determined by the means. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5, wherein

  According to the feature C6, the application corresponding period varies, and the effect period can be varied according to the variation. This makes it possible to diversify game renditions.

  According to the relationship with the feature C5, "the number of times the specific game is performed in the specific game period is different depending on the special information targeted for the provision determination in the winning game time. The execution means includes means for determining an effect period of the game effect effect in accordance with the number of times. "

  Feature C7. The winning probability that the determination result of the assignment determination is the assignment corresponding result is set higher than the non-winning probability that is the non-assignment corresponding result that the determination result of the assignment determination does not correspond to the assignment information. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6.

  According to the feature C7, the winning probability is set higher than the non-winning probability, so that the winning game time is more easily performed than the game time corresponding to the non-granting result. This makes it easier for the giving-response period to occur continuously, so that it is possible to increase the chance of performing a game rendition.

  Feature C8. The game according to Feature C7, wherein the game round operation period of the winning game round is set shorter than the game round operation period of the non-winning game round corresponding to the non-giving response result. Machine.

  If the winning probability is higher than the non-winning probability, the frequency of occurrence of the grant corresponding period becomes relatively high, and the digestibility of the game may be reduced. On the other hand, according to this feature, since the operation period for the game round of the winning game round is set relatively short, it is possible to reduce a decrease in the digestibility of the game.

  Also in this case, since the production period of the game rendition can be secured for the duration corresponding to the grant, the diversification of the game rendition is ensured.

  Feature C9. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C8, wherein the game round operation period of the winning game round is set shorter than the grant corresponding period.

  According to the feature C9, since the operation period for the game round of the winning game round is set shorter than the grant corresponding period, it is possible to reduce the decrease in the digestion rate of the game round while securing the degree of freedom in the grant corresponding period. Can be.

  Also in this case, since the production period of the game rendition can be secured for the duration corresponding to the grant, the diversification of the game rendition is ensured.

Feature C10. An information acquisition unit that acquires special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (a function of executing a prize winning process for the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, a function of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments). A function to execute a winning process for the operating port),
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as a plurality of numbers up to a predetermined number defined as the upper limit (the first electric utility holding area 231 in the first embodiment, the second and third implementation Holding ball storage area 321) in the form,
A determination is made as to whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage unit corresponds to the preset addition information, and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage unit. In this case, an assignment determining means for sequentially performing the assignment determination on the plurality of pieces of special information (the function of executing the support lottery process of the first general-purpose change start process in the MPU 202 of the first embodiment, the second and third implementations) A function of executing the process of step S1703 in the MPU 202 of the embodiment);
The game state is shifted to a predetermined assignment corresponding state based on that the assignment determination result by the assignment determining unit is an assignment corresponding result indicating that the special information to be determined corresponds to the assignment information. Shifting means (a function of executing the first electrical opening / closing process of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, and a function of shifting to the first opening / closing execution mode in the second and third embodiments);
Prior to the provision of the provision determination by the provision determination means or based on the provision of the provision determination by the provision determination means, a game replay operation is started, and corresponds to the determination result of the provision provision determination means. The end of the game replay operation as a notification result is set as one of the game replays, and the game replay operation of each game replay is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Game time control means (steps S505 to S505 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment) for controlling predetermined notification means (the first unit area 71 in the first embodiment, the first result display section 306a in the second and third embodiments) A function for executing the processing of S517, a function for the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments to control the display of the first result display unit 306a),
In a gaming machine equipped with
The game time control means, when the determination result of the grant determination means is a winning game time corresponding to the grant response result, from the end timing of the winning game time to the grant response period corresponding to the grant response state ( In the first embodiment, when the period in which the first electric accessory 41a is supported and the period in which the first opening / closing execution mode is performed in the second and third embodiments have elapsed, the next winning game time To start the game round,
The information that reflects the determination result when the special information related to the next game round among the special information acquired by the information acquisition unit is the target of the assignment determination, is compared with the time when the next game round is started. The destination specifying means for specifying at the previous timing (the function of executing the confirmation processing for the reservation notice of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, and the function of executing the processing of setting the reservation command of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments) When,
Based on the specification result by the destination specifying means, a predetermined display means (display screen G) starts changing display of a pattern at a predetermined timing of the provision corresponding period after the end of the winning game round, and By displaying the stop result corresponding to the specified result of the preceding specifying means by the end timing of the corresponding period or the end timing of the next game time, the determination result of the assignment determination for the special information related to the next game time is displayed. A gaming machine characterized by having an effect execution means (a function of executing various pending announcement effects in the MPU 242) for performing a game effect effect for notifying the user of the game.

  According to the feature C10, when the winning game time is performed, after the winning game time ends, the next game time is started after a lapse of the giving response period corresponding to the giving corresponding state. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a new game cycle from being started during the giving-response state, and it is possible to prevent the player's attention from being distracted.

  In such a configuration, the variable display of the pattern is started at a predetermined timing of the giving-response period based on the winning game times. The variable display is performed until the end timing of the application corresponding period or the end timing of the next game round. Then, by displaying the stop result, the determination result of the addition determination regarding the special information related to the next game time is reported. In this case, since the change display of the pattern is performed using the provision corresponding period, the change display of the pattern can be suitably performed even in the case where the game round operation period is short. Therefore, it is possible to suitably perform the game rendezvous effect, and it is possible to improve the interest.

  By the way, with respect to any one of the features C1 to C10, the features A1 to A17, the features B1 to B17, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E7, the features F1 to F4, and the features G1 To G4, or the configuration limited by any one of the following features H1 to H4. In this case, a further effect can be obtained by applying each configuration.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. Launching means (playing ball launching mechanism 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a player's launch operation;
Variable ball entry means (the second and third electric winning combinations 42 and 43 in the first embodiment) provided in the game area and switchable between an open state and a closed state;
On the basis of a predetermined specific opportunity, the variable ball entry control means (the second power source in the MPU 202) executes variable ball entry control for switching the variable ball entry means to the open state and then to the closed state in a predetermined game period. A function of performing a role opening / closing process and a third electrical role opening / closing process);
Privilege granting means (a function of controlling the payout device 116 based on a prize ball command in the payout control device 117) for giving a privilege based on the entry of a game ball into the variable ballistics means;
In a gaming machine equipped with
As the variable ball entry means, a first variable ball entry means (second electric accessory 42a) and a second variable ball entry means (third electric accessory 43a) are provided,
The variable ball entry control means,
Selecting means (a function of executing a second electric-gear opening / closing process or a third electric-gear opening / closing process in the MPU 202) for selecting one of the variable ball-entering means for executing the variable ball-entry control in the game period;
If any of the variable ball entry means is selected by the variable ball entry means by the selection means, during the game period, the variable ball entry means has an expected degree of ball entry into the variable ball entry means. After operating in a relatively low low expectation mode (opening for a short time), operating in a high expectation mode (opening for a long time) in which the expectation of entering the variable ball entry means is relatively high, A gaming machine comprising a mode determining means for determining a mode of the variable pitching means (a function of executing a second electric-gear opening / closing process and a third electric-gear opening / closing process in the MPU 202).

  According to the feature D1, the variable ball-in control may be performed on the first variable ball-in means or the second variable ball-in means during the game period based on the specific opportunity. Thereby, it is possible to play the game while predicting which variable ball entry control will be performed in the variable ball entry means during the game period, and to improve the interest through such a novel game, It is not known whether the variable ball entry control is performed by the variable ball entry means, and the player may be confused and the benefits obtained may be reduced.

  On the other hand, according to this feature, the variable pitching means selected by the selection means during the game period operates in the high expectation mode after operating in the low expectation mode. In this case, the player easily grasps the variable ball entry control target based on the operation of the low expectation degree mode, and adjusts the game ball to the variable ball entry control target in accordance with the operation of the high expectation degree mode. Can be fired at ball means. This can avoid the above-mentioned inconvenience that can be caused by providing two variable ball-in means.

  In particular, it is assumed that the player pays attention to each variable ball entry means during the game period. In this regard, according to this feature, since the variable ball-in control means, which is a target of interest of the player, is notified of the variable ball-in control object, the notification can be more appropriately viewed by the player. Can be.

  In addition, since the mode of the variable ball entry means for allowing the player to grasp the variable ball entry control target is the low expectation mode, the influence on the ball entry rate of game balls during the game period is small. Thereby, it is possible to notify the hitting by the variable ball entry means while suppressing the influence on the ball entry rate of the game balls during the game period.

Feature D2. The firing means fires a game ball at a predetermined specific cycle,
The gaming machine according to Feature D1, wherein a specific period longer than the specific cycle is provided between the high expectation mode and the low expectation mode.

  According to the feature D2, the specific period is set to be longer than the firing cycle of the game balls, so that the game balls are fired at least once during the specific period. Thus, the launch mode of the game ball can be adjusted toward the variable ball entry means for which the variable ball entry control is performed this time, based on the flow down mode of the game ball launched during the specific period. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately perform the game ball hitting during the specific period.

Feature D3. The expectation degree modes are a long-term mode and a short-term mode in which an open period, which is a period in which the variable ball-entry means is in the open state, is relatively long and short,
The game period is a predetermined upper limit period in which the open period of the short-term mode and the open period of the long-term mode are combined, or the number of game balls entered based on the short-term mode and the length. A specific game in which the variable game control is continued until one of the following events occurs: the number obtained by adding the number of game balls entered based on the period aspect to the predetermined upper limit number is specified. The gaming machine according to Feature D1 or Feature D2, which is a gaming period.

  According to the feature D3, the specific game ends when the period obtained by combining the open periods of both the short-term mode and the long-term mode is the upper limit period. In this case, since the mode for notifying the player of the current variable ball entry control target is the short-term mode, a long open period of the long-term mode can be ensured. As a result, it is possible to report the hitting by the variable ball entry means while securing the profit of the player.

Feature D4. The firing means fires a game ball at a predetermined specific cycle,
The gaming machine according to Feature D3, wherein the open period of the short period mode is set shorter than the specific cycle.

  According to the feature D4, since the open period of the short-term mode is shorter than the specific cycle, even if the game ball is fired after confirming the operation of the short-term mode, the game ball remains in the short-term mode. It is unlikely that the ball will enter the variable ball entry means. Thereby, it is possible to reduce a decrease in the ball entry rate during the specific game due to performing the short-term mode. Therefore, it is possible to reduce a loss of profit of the player that can be caused by performing the notification of the hitting by the variable ball-in means.

Feature D5. A launch operation means (a launch handle 29) operated by the player to perform the launch operation is provided, and based on the fact that the launch operation has been performed on the launch operation means, a game ball is directed from the launch means toward the game area. Fired configuration,
The firing means fires a game ball toward a first position in the game area when firing a game ball based on a first predetermined operation performed on the firing operation means. In the case where a game ball is fired based on a second predetermined operation different from the first predetermined operation performed on the firing operation means, a second position different from the first position in the game area is used. It fires a game ball toward the position,
When the game ball is fired toward the first position by the firing means, and when the game ball is fired toward the second position by the fire means, the degree of expectation to enter the ball is variable. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4, wherein the positions of the respective variable ball entry means in the game area are set so that the ball means is different.

  According to the feature D5, in order to obtain more benefits, a case where the player attempts to enter a game ball into the first variable ball entry means and a case where the player aims to enter a game ball into the second variable ball entry means Thus, it is necessary to change the mode of the firing operation on the firing operation means. For this reason, a player's attention can be drawn more to which variable ball entry means performs variable ball entry control.

Feature D6. A first lottery means (a function of executing the processing of step S603 of the MPU 202) for performing a lottery based on the first lottery opportunity (winning to the first through gate 51) as to whether or not to perform the variable ball control;
Second lottery means for performing a lottery on whether to perform the variable ball-in control based on a second lottery opportunity (winning to the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53) different from the first lottery opportunity. (Function of executing the processing of step S1003 or step S1209 of MPU 202);
With
The variable ball entry control means performs the variable ball entry control on the first variable ball entry means when a lottery result by the first lottery means is a winning result corresponding to performing the variable ball entry control. On the other hand, when the lottery result by the second lottery means is a winning result corresponding to performing the variable ball-in control, the variable ball-in control is performed for the second variable ball-in means. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D5.

  According to the feature D6, the lottery by the first lottery means and the lottery by the second lottery means are respectively executed independently. This allows the player to simultaneously confirm the state of the lottery by the two lottery means.

  In this case, the variable ball entry control target that is controlled when the lottery result of each lottery means is a winning result differs depending on each lottery means. Thereby, it is possible to grasp which of the lottery means is the variable ball-in control. On the other hand, since the two lottery means are independently performed, there may be a disadvantage that it is difficult to know which variable ball entry means is a variable ball entry control target.

  On the other hand, by applying the configuration of the feature D1, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that can be caused by performing the two lottery means independently.

Feature D7. A first display for starting a change display of symbols on a first display section (first unit area 71) based on a lottery by the first lottery means and displaying a stop result corresponding to a lottery result of the first lottery means. Control means (the function of executing the processing of steps S505 to S517 of the MPU 202);
Based on the lottery by the second lottery means, a symbol change display is started on a second display section (second unit area 72 or third unit area 73) different from the first display section, and the second lottery means Second display control means for displaying a stop result corresponding to the lottery result (a function of executing the processing of step S904 to step S914 or step S1204 to step S1214 of the MPU 202);
With
Each of the display control means,
When the symbol change display is performed, a period determining means (a function of executing the second general figure change start processing and the third general figure change start processing of the MPU 202) for determining a change display period in which the symbol change display is performed. )When,
A period measuring unit (a function of updating the second timer counter T2 and the third timer counter T3 of the MPU 202) for measuring the change display period;
With
In each of the display units, the change display of the symbol is performed in a predetermined change display mode in the change display period determined by the period determination unit,
The variable ball entry control means is configured to, based on a specific stop result corresponding to the result of the lottery of the first lottery means being the winning result being displayed on the first display section, to enter the first variable ball entry control. Means for controlling the second variable ball entry means based on the fact that a specific stop result corresponding to the lottery result of the second lottery means being the winning result is displayed on the second display unit. To do
Each of the change display periods is set to one of a plurality of different periods,
When the specific stop result is displayed on one of the display units in a state where the symbol change display is being performed on each of the display units, the measurement of the change display period corresponding to another display unit is temporarily stopped. The gaming machine according to Feature D6, further comprising a temporary stop unit (a function of executing a temporary stop process in the MPU 202).

  According to the feature D7, since the trigger of the change display of the symbol of each display section is different and each change display period fluctuates, it becomes difficult to know which variable ball entry means is to perform the variable ball entry control. I have. As a result, it is difficult to know which variable ball entry means performs the variable ball entry control at a timing before the start timing of the variable ball entry control. Therefore, a game can be played while predicting which variable ball entry means will perform variable ball entry control. On the other hand, it becomes difficult to know which variable ball entry means is a variable ball entry control target, and the player may be confused, resulting in an inconvenience that the obtained privilege is reduced.

  On the other hand, by applying the configuration of the feature D1, it is possible to provide a game that predicts a variable ball entry control target while reducing a drop in ball entry rate.

  Incidentally, for any one of the features D1 to D7, the features A1 to A17, the features B1 to B17, the features C1 to C10, the following features E1 to E7, the following features F1 to F4, and the following features G1 To G4, or the configuration limited by any one of the following features H1 to H4. In this case, a further effect can be obtained by applying each configuration.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. A shift determining unit (a function of executing the process of step S603 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, a second and a third mode) for determining whether to shift the gaming state based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition. A function of executing the process of step S1703 of the MPU 202 in the embodiment);
Based on the result of the determination by the shift determining means being a shift corresponding result corresponding to shifting the gaming state to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, shifting means for shifting the gaming state to the advantageous state (first A function of performing the deviation variation display of the first unit area 71 of the MPU 202 in the embodiment, a function of performing the deviation variation display of the first result display unit 306a of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments),
In a gaming machine equipped with
Measuring means for measuring a predetermined advantageous time based on the advantageous state (function of updating the first timer counter T1 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, first variation of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments) A function of updating the display time counter Tx),
An advantageous state ending means (a function of executing the processing of steps S510 and S511 of the MPU 202) for terminating the advantageous state when the measuring means measures that the advantageous time has elapsed;
A measurement time notification control means (a function of displaying the remaining advantageous time in the MPU 242) for notifying the time information corresponding to the measurement result by the measurement means by the notification means (symbol display device 81);
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature E1, an advantageous state is established based on the fact that the judgment result of the shift judging means is a shift correspondence result. The advantageous state continues until the advantageous time has elapsed.

  In such a configuration, the time information corresponding to the measurement result of the advantageous time is reported by the reporting means. Thus, during the advantageous state, it is possible to grasp the progress of the advantageous time directly connected to the player's profit, so that the degree of attention to the game during the advantageous state can be increased and the interest can be improved. .

Feature E2. The notification means is display means capable of displaying time,
The measurement time notification control means causes the display means to display a remaining advantageous time until the advantageous time elapses in the advantageous state based on the measurement result by the measuring means. The characteristic E1 A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  According to the feature E2, the remaining advantageous time is displayed on the display means. Thereby, the remaining advantageous time can be easily grasped.

Feature E3. A suspending unit (a function of executing a suspending process of the MPU 202) for suspending the measurement of the advantageous time by the measuring unit when a predetermined suspending condition is satisfied;
A measurement resuming unit (a function of executing the processing of steps S524 to S526 of the MPU 202) for resuming the measurement of the advantageous time by the measuring unit when a predetermined resuming condition is satisfied;
With
The measurement time notification control means, when the measurement by the measurement means is temporarily stopped, the notification of the time information at that time, is to stop temporarily until the measurement by the measurement means is resumed The gaming machine according to Feature E1 or Feature E2.

  According to the feature E3, when the temporary stop condition is satisfied, the measurement by the measuring unit is temporarily stopped, and the temporary stop is maintained until the restart condition is satisfied. In this case, the reporting of the time information by the reporting means is also suspended in synchronization with the suspension. This makes it possible to synchronize the measurement result by the measuring unit and the notification of the time information in a situation where the measurement by the measuring unit is temporarily stopped.

Feature E4. Launching means (playing ball launching mechanism 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a player's launch operation;
Variable pitching means provided in the game area and capable of switching between an open state and a closed state (the second or third power winning opening 42 or 43 in the first embodiment, the second and third embodiments). The second grand prize mouth 302a) of the
A privilege granting means for granting a privilege to the player based on the entry of the game ball into the variable ball entry means (a function of controlling the payout device 116 based on the prize ball command in the payout control device 117);
Opening / closing control means for controlling the variable ball-entry means so that the variable ball-entry means opens and closes in a predetermined operation mode based on a predetermined specific opportunity (the second electric-power opening / closing process of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment) And a function of executing a third electric winning opening / closing process, a function of performing opening / closing control of the second winning port 302a of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments),
With
The advantageous state is a state in which the frequency of occurrence of the specific opportunity becomes relatively high,
The temporary stop condition is that the opening and closing operation is started in the variable ball entry means,
The gaming machine according to Feature E3, wherein the restart condition is that the opening / closing operation in the variable ball-in means is ended.

  According to the feature E4, the opening / closing operation of the variable ball entry means is performed in the advantageous state. This makes it easy for game balls to enter the variable ball entry means, so that benefits can be easily given to the player, which is advantageous for the player.

  In such a configuration, while the opening / closing operation is being performed in the variable ball entry means, the measurement of the advantageous time is temporarily stopped. Thereby, since the opening and closing operation of the variable ball entry means and the update of the advantageous time do not occur at the same time, it is possible to prevent the player's attention from being distracted.

  Feature E5. When it is measured by the measuring means that the advantageous time has elapsed, it is determined whether a predetermined extension condition is satisfied, and if it is determined that the extension condition is satisfied, The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4, further comprising an extension means for extending the advantageous state by a predetermined extension time (a function of executing a process during an off-display of the MPU 202).

  According to the feature E5, when the extension condition is satisfied, the advantageous state is extended by the predetermined time. In this way, the advantageous state continues despite the fact that the advantageous time has elapsed by the informing means, so that it is possible to provide the player with unexpectedness and whether the extension condition is satisfied. It is possible to reach the lapse of advantageous time while being interested in.

Feature E6. The game replay operation is started based on the result of the transfer determination performed by the transfer determination means, and the game replay operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the transfer determination means. The predetermined notification means (the first unit area 71, the second unit and the third A game turn control unit (a function of executing the processing of steps S505 to S517 of the MPU 202) for controlling the first result display unit 306a) in the embodiment,
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, wherein the advantageous time is a time during which a winning game time corresponding to a result of the shift determination being the shift corresponding result is performed.

  According to the feature E6, the advantageous time is the time during which the winning game time is performed, so that a game integrated with the game time and the advantageous state can be provided. Thereby, interest can be improved.

Feature E7. An information acquisition unit that acquires special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (a function of executing a prize winning process for the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, a function of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments). A function to execute a winning process for the operating port),
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as a plurality of numbers up to a predetermined number defined as the upper limit (the first electric utility holding area 231 in the first embodiment, the second and third implementation Holding ball storage area 321) in the form,
With
The transition determination unit determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage unit corresponds to the transition to the advantageous state, and stores a plurality of pieces of information in the acquisition information storage unit. When special information is stored, the shift determination is sequentially performed on the plurality of pieces of special information,
The game time control means is a time determining means (MPU 202 in the first embodiment) for determining a game time operation time, which is a time during which the game time is performed, based on the special information which has been determined by the shift determination means. (The first special figure change start processing, the first special figure change start processing of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments), and when each game round is performed, the game round determined by the time determining means is used. It is to perform the game round operation in an operation mode corresponding to the operation time,
The information of the determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the acquisition information storage unit is the target of the shift determination, and the game round when the game round related to the predetermined special information is performed. The destination specifying means for specifying the information of the operation time at a timing before the game round related to the predetermined special information is performed (the function of acquiring the fluctuation type counter CS in the confirmation processing for the suspension notice of the MPU 202 and the fluctuation Function to grasp the variable display time based on the type counter CS)
In the situation where the predetermined winning game time is started, the measurement time notification control means specifies that the next game time with respect to the predetermined winning game time is the winning game time by the preceding specifying means. In this case, the time information corresponding to the time obtained by adding the operation time for the game related to the winning game time on the rear side to the operation time for the game time related to the winning game time is notified. The gaming machine according to Feature E6, wherein:

  According to the feature E7, when the winning game times are continuously performed, the game time operation time related to the rearward winning game time is added to the game time operating time related to the front winning game time. The information corresponding to the time that was set is notified. This allows the player to recognize the 2 advantageous state as the 1 advantageous state with a long advantageous time. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the game in the advantageous state, and it is possible to more appropriately improve the interest.

  Incidentally, for any one of the above features E1 to E7, the above features A1 to A17, the above features B1 to B17, the above features C1 to C10, the above features D1 to D7, the following features F1 to F4, and the following features G1 To G4, or the configuration limited by any one of the following features H1 to H4. In this case, a further effect can be obtained by applying each configuration.

<Characteristic F group>
Feature F1. A shift determining unit (a function of executing the process of step S603 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, a second and a third mode) for determining whether to shift the gaming state based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition. A function of executing the process of step S1703 of the MPU 202 in the embodiment);
Setting means for setting the gaming state to the advantageous state based on the result of the determination by the transition determining means being a transition corresponding result corresponding to shifting the gaming state to an advantageous state advantageous to the player (first A function of performing the deviation variation display of the first unit area 71 of the MPU 202 in the embodiment, a function of performing the deviation variation display of the first result display unit 306a of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments),
In a gaming machine equipped with
Lottery means for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on a predetermined lottery opportunity (the function of executing the processing of step S1003 or step S1209 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, the second And a function of executing the process of step S1803 of the MPU 202 in the third embodiment)
Privilege granting means for granting a privilege to the player when the lottery result by the lottery means is a winning result corresponding to granting a privilege (controls the payout device 116 based on the prize ball command in the payout control device 117). Function) and
With
The advantageous state is a state in which the lottery by the lottery means can be repeatedly performed a plurality of times,
A variation means for varying the duration of the advantageous state (the function of executing the processing of Step S608 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, and the function of executing the processing of Step S1708 of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments) A gaming machine characterized by being.

  According to the feature F1, an advantageous state is set based on the fact that the judgment result of the shift judging means is a shift corresponding result. During the advantageous state, a lottery may be performed by the lottery means. If the lottery result of the lottery means is a winning result, a privilege is given to the player. In this case, since the lottery of the lottery means can be repeatedly performed in the advantageous state, it is assumed that the player performs more lotteries by the lottery means in the advantageous state. Thereby, the degree of attention to the game in the advantageous state can be increased, and the interest can be improved.

  In such a configuration, the number of times the lottery is performed by the lottery means changes as the duration of the advantageous state changes. As a result, the privilege given to the player in one advantageous state varies according to the variation of the duration of the advantageous state. Therefore, the degree of attention to the duration of the advantageous state can be increased, and the interest can be more appropriately improved.

Feature F2. Measuring means for measuring the duration of the advantageous state (the function of updating the first timer counter T1 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, the function of updating the first variable display time counter Tx of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments) )When,
On the basis of the lottery by the lottery means, the symbol change in a predetermined display unit (the second unit area 72 or the third unit area 73 in the first embodiment, the second result display unit 306b in the second and third embodiments). Display control for starting display and displaying a stop result corresponding to the lottery result of the lottery means as a unit game when a predetermined change display period has elapsed, and performing each unit game according to the lottery of the lottery means Means (function of executing processing of step S904 to step S914 or step S1204 to step S1214 of MPU 202 in the first embodiment, function of performing display control of second result display unit 306b of MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments) When,
With
The display control means, when a lottery result of the lottery means corresponds to the winning result, a winning unit game is performed. From the end timing of the unit game, a grant corresponding period for giving a privilege to the player ( When the support of the second electric accessory 42a or the third electric accessory 43a in the first embodiment, the second opening / closing execution mode in the second and third embodiments) elapses, the next unit with respect to the winning unit game To start the game,
The gaming machine according to Feature F1, further comprising a suspending unit (a function of executing a suspending process in the MPU 202) for temporarily suspending the measurement by the measuring unit during the application corresponding period.

  According to the feature F2, the measurement of the duration of the advantageous state is temporarily stopped during the provision period. Thus, there is no need to set the continuation period of the advantageous state and the change display period in consideration of the provision response period. Therefore, it is possible to easily set the duration of the advantageous state and the change display period.

Feature F3. The game replay operation is started based on the result of the transfer determination performed by the transfer determination means, and the game replay operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the transfer determination means. The predetermined notification means (the first unit area 71, the second unit and the third A game turn control unit (a function of executing the processing of steps S505 to S517 of the MPU 202) for controlling the first result display unit 306a) in the embodiment,
The gaming machine according to Feature F1 or Feature F2, wherein the continuation period of the advantageous state is a period in which a winning game time corresponding to the determination result of the shift determination being the shift corresponding result is performed.

  According to the feature F3, the continuation period of the advantageous state is a period in which the winning game time is performed, so that a game integrated with the game time and the advantageous state can be provided. Thereby, interest can be improved.

Feature F4. An information acquisition unit that acquires special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (a function of executing a prize winning process for the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, a function of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments). A function to execute a winning process for the operating port),
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as a plurality of numbers up to a predetermined number defined as the upper limit (the first electric utility holding area 231 in the first embodiment, the second and third implementation Holding ball storage area 321) in the form,
With
The transition determination unit determines whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage unit corresponds to the transition to the advantageous state, and stores a plurality of pieces of information in the acquisition information storage unit. When special information is stored, the shift determination is sequentially performed on the plurality of pieces of special information,
The game time control means is a period determining means (MPU 202 in the first embodiment) for determining a game time operation period, which is a period in which the game time is performed, based on the special information determined by the shift determination means. (The first special figure change start processing, the first special figure change start processing of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments), and when each of the game rounds is performed, the game round determined by the period determining means is used. The game round operation is performed in an operation mode corresponding to an operation period,
The information of the determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the acquisition information storage unit is the target of the shift determination, and the game round when the game round related to the predetermined special information is performed. The destination specifying means for specifying the information of the operation period at a timing before the game round related to the predetermined special information is performed (the function of acquiring the change type counter CS in the confirmation processing for the reservation notice of the MPU 202 and the change A function of grasping the variable display time based on the type counter CS);
In a situation where the predetermined winning game time is started, when the preceding specifying means determines that the next game time is the winning game time with respect to the predetermined winning game time, The notification means (symbol display device 81) notifies the information corresponding to the period in which the game operation time related to the winning game time on the rear side is added to the game operation time related to the winning game time. Means (a function of displaying the remaining advantageous time in the MPU 242);
The gaming machine according to Feature F3, comprising:

  According to the feature F4, when the winning game times are continuously performed, the game time operation period related to the rear winning game time is added to the game time operation period related to the front winning game time. The information corresponding to the time period is notified. This allows the player to recognize the second advantageous state as the first advantageous state in which the duration of the advantageous state is long. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the game in the advantageous state, and it is possible to more appropriately improve the interest.

  Incidentally, for any one of the features F1 to F4, the features A1 to A17, the features B1 to B17, the features C1 to C10, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E7, and the following features G1 To G4, or the configuration limited by any one of the following features H1 to H4. In this case, a further effect can be obtained by applying each configuration.

<Feature G group>
Feature G1. Launching means (playing ball launching mechanism 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a player's launch operation;
A first passage portion (first through gate 51) and a second passage portion (second through gate 52 or third through gate 53) provided in the game area and through which a game ball can pass;
A first specific control execution means (a function of executing the processes of steps S202 to S205 in the MPU 202) for executing a predetermined first specific control based on the game ball having passed through the first passing portion;
A second specific control execution means (in the MPU 202, for executing steps S207 to S209 in the MPU 202) for executing a second specific control which is the same type of specific control as the first specific control based on the game ball having passed through the second passing portion; Function to execute processing)
With
The relative positional relationship between the first passing portion and the second passing portion is set such that the game ball that has passed through the first passing portion can pass through the second passing portion,
A game ball such that a frequency at which a game ball passes through the second passage portion without passing through the first passage portion is lower than a frequency at which the game ball passes through the first passage portion and passes through the second passage portion. A gaming machine provided with a flow-down mode restricting means (restriction nail 64b) for restricting the flow-down mode.

  According to the feature G1, the first passing unit and the second passing unit are provided, and by passing through these, each specific control is performed independently. Thereby, as compared with the configuration in which one specific control is performed, the diversification of the game can be achieved, and the interest can be improved.

  In such a configuration, the game ball that has passed through the first passage portion can flow down the game area and pass through the second passage portion, so that each specific control can occur simultaneously. As a result, it is possible to provide a game in which each specific control is actively generated simultaneously, and it is possible to more appropriately improve the interest.

  In this case, since the frequency of passing through the second passing portion without passing through the first passing portion is set to be lower than the frequency of the game ball passing through the second passing portion via the first passing portion, the second identification is performed. A situation in which only control is performed can be avoided. Thereby, it is possible to suitably provide a game in which each specific control is actively generated simultaneously.

Feature G2. Launching means (playing ball launching mechanism 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a player's launch operation;
A first passage portion (first through gate 51) and a second passage portion (second through gate 52 or third through gate 53) provided in the game area and through which a game ball can pass;
First lottery means (a function of executing the processing of steps S202 to S205 in the MPU 202) for performing a lottery on whether or not to execute the first specific control based on the game ball having passed through the first passing section; ,
A second lottery means (a step S207 to a step S209 in the MPU 202) for performing a lottery based on whether the game ball has passed through the second passing section and whether to execute a second specific control different from the first specific control. Etc.), and
With
The relative positional relationship between the first passing portion and the second passing portion is set such that the game ball that has passed through the first passing portion can pass through the second passing portion,
A game ball such that a frequency at which a game ball passes through the second passage portion without passing through the first passage portion is lower than a frequency at which the game ball passes through the first passage portion and passes through the second passage portion. A gaming machine provided with a flow-down mode restricting means (restriction nail 64b) for restricting the flow-down mode.

  According to the feature G2, the first passing unit and the second passing unit are provided, and by passing through these, the lottery by each lottery unit is performed independently. As a result, compared to the configuration in which one lottery is performed, it is possible to diversify the game and improve the interest.

  In such a configuration, the game ball that has passed through the first passage portion can flow down the game area and pass through the second passage portion, so that the lottery by each lottery means can occur simultaneously. As a result, it is possible to provide a game in which each lottery is actively generated at the same time, and it is possible to more appropriately improve the interest.

  In this case, the frequency of passing the second passing portion without passing through the first passing portion is set to be lower than the frequency of the game balls passing through the second passing portion via the first passing portion. It is possible to avoid a situation where only a lottery by means is performed. Thereby, it is possible to suitably provide a game in which lottery by each lottery means is actively generated simultaneously.

Feature G3. A first display for starting a change display of symbols on a first display section (first unit area 71) based on a lottery by the first lottery means and displaying a stop result corresponding to a lottery result of the first lottery means. Control means (the function of executing the processing of steps S505 to S517 of the MPU 202);
Based on the lottery by the second lottery means, a symbol change display is started on a second display section (second unit area 72 or third unit area 73) different from the first display section, and the second lottery means Second display control means for displaying a stop result corresponding to the lottery result (a function of executing the processing of step S904 to step S914 or step S1204 to step S1214 of the MPU 202);
With
Each of the display control means can perform the change display of the symbol on the other display unit during the change display of the symbol on one of the display units,
When a specific stop result corresponding to the execution of the first specific control is displayed on the first display unit while the symbol change display is being performed on the second display unit, the second display unit The symbol change display and the lottery result that triggered the change display performed in step (a).
When the lottery result by the first lottery means is a winning result corresponding to the execution of the first specific control, the symbol change display period of the first display unit is the symbol change display period of the second display unit. The gaming machine according to Feature G2, wherein the gaming machine is apt to be shorter than the period.

  According to the feature G3, the lottery by the first lottery means and the lottery by the second lottery means are independently executed based on the passing of the game ball through the first passing part or the second passing part. Then, based on these lotteries, the symbol change display is performed independently on the first display unit and the second display unit, and when the specific stop result is displayed on the first display unit or the second display unit. Executes the first specific control or the second specific control. Thereby, an event in which the first specific control or the second specific control is executed may occur during the change display of the symbol on the one display unit, so that a novel game can be provided, and the degree of attention to the game can be provided. Can be further enhanced.

  Further, when the specific stop result corresponding to the execution of the first specific control is displayed on the first display unit, the change display of the symbol performed on the second display unit and the lottery that triggered the change display are performed. The result is invalidated. Thereby, it is possible to provide a novel game in which the two specific controls are related.

  Further, when the lottery result by the first lottery means is a winning result, the change display period of the first display unit is likely to be shorter than the change display period of the second display unit. Since the timing at which the game ball passes through the first passing portion is earlier than the timing at which the gaming ball passes through the second passing portion, the start timing of the symbol change display on the first display portion is the timing on the second display portion. This is likely to be before the timing. Thus, when the lottery result by the first lottery means is a winning result, the change display of the symbol on the first display unit is easily ended before the change display of the symbol on the second display unit. Therefore, it is possible to create a situation in which the first specific control is more likely to be executed preferentially than the second specific control, while performing the change display of the symbol of each display unit independently.

Feature G4. Launching means (playing ball launching mechanism 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a player's launch operation;
A first passage portion (first through gate 51) and a second passage portion (second through gate 52 or third through gate 53) provided in the game area and through which a game ball can pass;
A first specific control execution means (a function of executing the processes of steps S202 to S205 in the MPU 202) for executing a predetermined first specific control based on the game ball having passed through the first passing portion;
A second specific control execution means (a function of executing the processing of steps S207 to S209 in the MPU 202) for executing a predetermined second specific control based on the game ball having passed through the second passing section; ,
With
The relative positional relationship between the first passing portion and the second passing portion is set such that the game ball that has passed through the first passing portion can pass through the second passing portion,
A game ball such that a frequency at which a game ball passes through the second passage portion without passing through the first passage portion is lower than a frequency at which the game ball passes through the first passage portion and passes through the second passage portion. A gaming machine provided with a flow-down mode restricting means (restriction nail 64b) for restricting the flow-down mode.

  According to the feature G4, the first passing unit and the second passing unit are provided, and by passing through these, each specific control is performed independently. Thereby, as compared with the configuration in which one specific control is performed, the diversification of the game can be achieved, and the interest can be improved.

  In such a configuration, the game ball that has passed through the first passage portion can flow down the game area and pass through the second passage portion, so that each specific control can occur simultaneously. As a result, it is possible to provide a game in which each specific control is actively generated simultaneously, and it is possible to more appropriately improve the interest.

  In this case, since the frequency of passing through the second passing portion without passing through the first passing portion is set to be lower than the frequency of the game ball passing through the second passing portion via the first passing portion, the second identification is performed. A situation in which only control is performed can be avoided. Thereby, it is possible to suitably provide a game in which each specific control is actively generated simultaneously.

  By the way, with respect to any one of the features G1 to G4, the features A1 to A17, the features B1 to B17, the features C1 to C10, the features D1 to D7, the features E1 to E7, and the feature F1 F4 to F4, and a configuration limited by any one of the following features H1 to H4 may be applied. In this case, a further effect can be obtained by applying each configuration.

<Characteristic H group>
Feature H1. Launching means (playing ball launching mechanism 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a player's launch operation;
When a game ball enters a predetermined ball entry portion (the first electric winning hole 41 in the first embodiment, the upper operating ports 303 and 401 in the second and third embodiments) provided in the game area. A lottery means (first implementation) for performing a random determination as to whether or not to generate a specific state (support of the first electric accessory 41a in the first embodiment, first opening / closing execution mode in the second and third embodiments) based on the first state. A function of executing the processing of step S603 of the MPU 202 in the embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of step S1703 of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments);
If the lottery result obtained by the lottery means is a winning result corresponding to the occurrence of the specific state, a specific state transition means for transitioning a game state to the specific state (a first electric-power opening / closing process of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment) , The function of shifting the MPU 202 to the first opening / closing execution mode in the second and third embodiments),
If the lottery result by the lottery means is a non-winning result that does not correspond to the occurrence of the specific state, an advantageous state transition means (first embodiment) for transiting the gaming state to an advantageous state more advantageous to the player than the specific state The MPU 202 according to the present embodiment has a function of performing the deviation variation display of the first unit area 71, and the MPU 202 of the second and third embodiments has a function of performing the deviation variation display of the first result display unit 306a. A gaming machine.

  According to the feature H1, when the lottery result by the lottery means is a winning result, the state shifts to the specific state. On the other hand, when the lottery result by the lottery means is a non-winning result, the state shifts to an advantageous state which is more advantageous to the player than the specific state. Thereby, since the degree of advantage is opposite to that of the normal game mode, unexpectedness can be given in the game, and a novel game can be provided. Therefore, interest can be improved.

Feature H2. A first variable ball entry means provided in the game area and capable of switching between an open state and a closed state (the first winning combination 41 in the first embodiment, the first large winning opening in the second and third embodiments) 301a);
A second variable ball entry means provided in the game area and having a higher degree of expectation for a game ball to enter than the first variable ball entry means when the same opening / closing operation as the first variable ball entry means is performed. (The second winning combination 42 or the third winning combination 43 in the first embodiment, the second winning combination 302a in the second and third embodiments),
Privilege granting means (a function of controlling the payout device 116 based on a prize ball command in the payout control device 117) for giving a privilege based on the entry of a game ball into each of the variable ballistics means,
A variable ball entry control for selecting one or both of the variable ball entry means, and switching the variable ball entry means selected by the selection means to the closed state after opening the variable ball entry means; Variable entry control means to be executed (the function of executing the second and third electric-gear opening / closing processes in the MPU 202 of the first embodiment, the function of the second big winning opening 302a of the MPU 202 of the second and third embodiments) Open / close control) and
With
In the specific state, the variable ball entry control is set to be easier to be performed for the first variable ball entry unit than for the second variable ball entry unit,
The gaming machine according to Feature H1, wherein in the advantageous state, the variable ball-entry control is set to be more easily performed for the second variable ball-entry means than for the first variable ball-entry means.

  According to the feature H2, in the advantageous state, the variable ball-in control is performed for the second variable ball-in means provided separately from the first variable ball-in means. The degree of expectation of the second variable ball entry means is higher than the degree of expectation of the first variable ball entry means. Thereby, the advantageous state is more advantageous for the player than the specific state.

  In particular, by providing the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means separately, the advantageous state and the specific state can be clearly distinguished. As a result, it is possible to easily grasp which state the player is in.

  Feature H3. Restriction means provided in the game area, for restricting the entry of game balls into the first variable ball entry means, regardless of the opening / closing operation of the first variable ball entry means (first specification in the first embodiment) The gaming machine according to Feature H2, further comprising a control nail 64c, and a control nail 307b) in the second and third embodiments.

  According to the feature H3, the entering of the first variable entering means is physically restricted by the restricting means. This makes it possible to vary the degree of expectation of each variable ball entry means to enter the ball without complicating the opening and closing operation of each variable ball entry means. Therefore, the effect of the feature H2 can be obtained with a simple configuration as compared with the configuration in which the configuration relating to the setting of the opening / closing operation mode of each variable ball entry means is provided.

Feature H4. The lottery means is a first lottery means for performing a lottery based on a first lottery opportunity to determine whether to generate the specific state,
The second lottery opportunity different from the first lottery opportunity (winning to the second through gate 52 or the third through gate 53 in the first embodiment, winning to the lower operating ports 304 and 402 in the second and third embodiments) ), A grant-response state in which a grant-response game for granting a privilege to a player is performed (support of the second electric auditors component 42a or the third electric auditors component 43a, the second and third electric agents 43a in the first embodiment). Second lottery means for performing a lottery as to whether or not to generate the second opening / closing execution mode in the embodiment (a function of executing the processing of step S1003 or step S1209 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, the second and third embodiments) Function for executing the processing of step S1803 of the MPU 202 in
Based on the lottery by the first lottery means, a symbol change display is started on the first display unit (the first unit area 71 in the first embodiment, the first result display unit 306a in the second and third embodiments). A first display control means for displaying a stop result corresponding to the lottery result of the first lottery means (the function of executing the processing of steps S505 to S517 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment, the second display control means in the second and third embodiments) A function of controlling display of the first result display unit 306a of the MPU 202);
On the basis of the lottery by the second lottery means, a second display section different from the first display section (the second unit area 72 or the third unit area 73 in the first embodiment, the second display area in the second and third embodiments) (2) second display control means (to start the symbol change display on the second result display unit 306b) and display a stop result corresponding to the lottery result of the second lottery means (steps S904 to S914 of the MPU 202 in the first embodiment or A function of executing the processing of steps S1204 to S1214, a function of performing display control of the second result display unit 306b of the MPU 202 in the second and third embodiments), and
With
Each of the display control means can perform the change display of the symbol on the other display unit during the change display of the symbol on one of the display units,
When a specific stop result corresponding to the occurrence of the specific state is displayed on the first display unit in a state where the symbol change display is being performed on the second display unit, a line is displayed on the second display unit. An invalidating means (a function of executing a fluctuation reset process of the MPU 202) for invalidating the change display of the symbol and the lottery result which triggered the change display.
When the lottery result by the first lottery means is the winning result, the symbol change display period of the first display unit is set to be shorter than the symbol change display period of the second display unit. Yes,
The advantageous state transition means, when the lottery result by the first lottery means is the non-winning result, the first display unit of the first display unit over a period longer than the symbol change display period of the second display unit The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H3, further comprising: means for facilitating the change display of the symbol.

  According to the feature H4, the lottery by the first lottery means and the lottery by the second lottery means are respectively executed independently, and based on these lotteries, the change display of the symbol is displayed on the first display unit and the second display unit. Each is done independently. Then, when the specific stop result is displayed on the first display unit or the second display unit, the state shifts to the specific state or the provision corresponding state. Thereby, an event of shifting to the specific state or the provision corresponding state may occur during the change display of the symbol on one of the display units, so that it is possible to provide a novel game, and it is possible to increase attention to the game. it can.

  In such a configuration, when the lottery result by the first lottery means is a winning result, the change display of the symbol on the first display unit is likely to end at a timing before the end timing of the change display of the symbol on the second display unit. . As a result, the gaming state is more likely to be a specific state than the providing state.

  On the other hand, when the lottery result by the first lottery means is a non-winning result, the change display of the symbols on the second display unit is likely to end at a timing before the end timing of the change display of the symbols on the first display unit. As a result, the gaming state is more likely to be the provision corresponding state than the specific state. Therefore, an advantageous state for the player can be created.

  Incidentally, for any one of the above-mentioned features H1 to H4, the above-mentioned features A1 to A17, the above-mentioned features B1 to B17, the above-mentioned features C1 to C10, the above-mentioned features D1 to D7, the above-mentioned features E1 to E7, and the above-mentioned features F1 To F4, and the configuration limited by any one of the above-described features G1 to G4. In this case, a further effect can be obtained by applying each configuration.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine, 27 ... Gaming ball launching mechanism, 33 ... Game board, 41-43 ... Electricity winning opening, 41a-43a ... Electric accessory, 51-53 ... Thru gate, 62 ... Accessory display part, 64b ... regulating nails, 64c ... first specific regulating nails, 64d ... second specific regulating nails, 64e ... distribution guiding nails, 71-73 ... unit area, 81 ... symbol display device, 101 ... main control device, 102 ... voice emission control Apparatus, 202: MPU of main controller 101, 242: MPU of audio light emission controller 102, 300: gaming board in the second embodiment, 301: first variable prize apparatus, 302: second variable prize apparatus, 303: upper Operating port, 304 lower operating port, 306 main display section, 306a first result display section, 306b second result display section, 400 gaming board in the third embodiment, 401 upper operating port, 402 lower Working port, 02a ... electric auditors products, 403 ... through the gate, 404 ... character object display unit.

Claims (1)

Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition,
Acquired information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, up to a predetermined number predetermined as a plurality of numbers,
A determination is made as to whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage unit corresponds to the preset addition information, and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage unit. In this case, an assignment determining unit that sequentially performs the assignment determination on the plurality of pieces of special information,
The game state is shifted to a predetermined assignment corresponding state based on that the assignment determination result by the assignment determining unit is an assignment corresponding result indicating that the special information to be determined corresponds to the assignment information. Means of transition;
A game replay operation is started based on the provision of the provision determination by the provision determination means, and the game return operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the provision determination means. As one time, game time control means for controlling a predetermined notification means so that the game time operation of each game time is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The game time control means, when the determination result of the grant determination means is a winning game time corresponding to the grant response result, the grant response period corresponding to the grant corresponding state from the end timing of the winning game time. When the time has elapsed, the next game time with respect to the winning game time is started,
The information that reflects the determination result when the special information related to the next game round among the special information acquired by the information acquisition unit is the target of the assignment determination, is compared with the time when the next game round is started. Is also specified at the previous timing, and based on the specified result, over the application corresponding period after the end of the winning game time and the game time operation period in which the next game time is performed, the next time A first rendering execution means for performing a series of gaming performances pertaining to a gaming performance, or a gaming performance in which the winning gaming performance is performed when the determination result of the providing determining means is a winning gaming performance corresponding to the providing corresponding result. At least any one of the second effect execution means of the second effect execution means for performing a series of game effect effects related to the selected game time over the operation operation period and the grant corresponding period after the end of the selected game time. When,
A first state in which the game ball is provided in the game area where the game ball flows down, wherein the game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter, and a second state in which the game ball can enter or is easier to enter than the first state. Switchable variable ball entry means,
A variable ball-in control means capable of changing the variable ball-in means from the first state to the second state and then performing the variable ball-in control to make the first state;
With
The provision corresponding state is a state in which the variable ball-in control by the variable ball-in control means can be executed a plurality of times,
The variable ball entry control means is capable of executing the next variable ball entry control without a game ball entering the variable ball entry means in one variable ball entry control. Gaming machine.

Images